WO2017113391A1 - Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station - Google Patents

Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017113391A1
WO2017113391A1 PCT/CN2015/100312 CN2015100312W WO2017113391A1 WO 2017113391 A1 WO2017113391 A1 WO 2017113391A1 CN 2015100312 W CN2015100312 W CN 2015100312W WO 2017113391 A1 WO2017113391 A1 WO 2017113391A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
user equipment
information
indication information
base station
further configured
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2015/100312
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
常俊仁
冯淑兰
夏金环
张向东
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP15912015.3A priority Critical patent/EP3389329B1/en
Priority to PCT/CN2015/100312 priority patent/WO2017113391A1/en
Priority to CN201580085281.8A priority patent/CN108370594B/en
Publication of WO2017113391A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017113391A1/en
Priority to US16/023,353 priority patent/US10412705B2/en
Priority to US16/535,818 priority patent/US20190364539A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L9/00—Cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communications; Network security protocols
    • H04L9/08—Key distribution or management, e.g. generation, sharing or updating, of cryptographic keys or passwords
    • H04L9/0816—Key establishment, i.e. cryptographic processes or cryptographic protocols whereby a shared secret becomes available to two or more parties, for subsequent use
    • H04L9/0838—Key agreement, i.e. key establishment technique in which a shared key is derived by parties as a function of information contributed by, or associated with, each of these
    • H04L9/0847—Key agreement, i.e. key establishment technique in which a shared key is derived by parties as a function of information contributed by, or associated with, each of these involving identity based encryption [IBE] schemes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/08—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
    • H04W48/12—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery using downlink control channel
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0229—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a wanted signal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/005—Transmission of information for alerting of incoming communication
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/19—Connection re-establishment
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present invention relate to communication technologies, and in particular, to a data transmission processing method, a user equipment, and a base station.
  • NB-IoT Narrow Band Internet Of Things
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • ultra-low complexity and ultra-low power are two key requirements.
  • the terminal device in the traditional LTE system and the IoT device in the NB-IoT are collectively referred to as User Equipment (UE).
  • UE User Equipment
  • the UE is usually idle when there is no service to be transmitted.
  • Mode idle mode
  • the UE needs to enter the connection mode from the idle mode.
  • the network side device mainly includes a base station, such as an eUTRAN NodeB (eNB), and a Mobility Management Entity (MME) and a Serving GateWay (SGW) core network device.
  • eNB eUTRAN NodeB
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • SGW Serving GateWay
  • the main purpose of a large number of message interactions is to establish a connection between the UE and the eNB and establish an effective access layer context.
  • the current 3GPP organization agrees to save the access layer context information (hereinafter referred to as context information) on the UE side and the eNB side, in particular, some UE-specific connections.
  • context information the access layer context information
  • the inbound layer parameters are saved, so that the Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling overhead can be reduced, thereby facilitating rapid access to the network and recovering data transmission based on the context information stored in the UE and the eNB.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the UE and the eNB save the context information of the UE, especially for the case that the UE has downlink data to be transmitted, the UE generally triggers the recovery of the data according to the received paging message.
  • the processing of the transmission therefore, how the UE receives the paging message to further reduce the power consumption of the UE is a problem to be solved.
  • the UE generally receives the paging message by first calculating a paging frame (Paging Frame, PF for short) and a paging occasion (Paging Occasion, PO for short).
  • PF paging frame
  • Paging Occasion PO for short
  • one paging occasion may be one subframe.
  • the determination of PF and PO is calculated according to the following formula:
  • the PF is derived by the following formula, that is, the system frame number (SFN) that satisfies the following formula is obtained:
  • PO is first derived by the following formula to obtain i_s, and then based on the obtained i_s, according to the UE's system, the corresponding PO value is obtained from the table below:
  • T is the DRX cycle of the UE
  • nB is taken from: 4T, 2T, T, T/2, T/4, T/8, T/16, T/32;
  • N min(T, nB);
  • Ns max(1, nB/T);
  • UE_ID IMSI mod 1024.
  • the UE's standard generally includes Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD) and Time Division Duplexing (TDD).
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplexing
  • TDD Time Division Duplexing
  • the UE After the PF and the PO are determined, the UE performs a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) on the Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) by using a Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier (P-RNTI) at the determined PO time. Decoding, and then receiving a paging message from a Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) according to the resource indicated by the PDCCH. The UE is included in the received paging message When identifying the information, the UE determines that it is the paged UE and accesses the network according to the indication of the network.
  • P-RNTI Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • the paging message when the UE decodes the PDCCH at the PO time and further receives the paging message from the PDSCH, the paging message may not have the identification information of the UE, that is, in this case, For the UE, this is a False Paging.
  • the current paging mechanism is for power-sensitive UEs. It is easy to cause a waste of power consumption.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a data transmission processing method, a user equipment, and a base station, which avoids waste of power consumption of the UE by preventing the UE, especially the power-sensitive UE, from receiving a false paging message.
  • a first aspect of the present invention provides a data transmission processing method, where an execution subject of the method is a user equipment, and the method includes:
  • the user equipment receives the first indication information sent by the base station, and saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the user equipment;
  • the user equipment according to the identifier information of the user equipment, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH is obtained, and the second indication information is obtained, including:
  • the above solution has the following technical effects: by carrying in the PDCCH for the paged object
  • the indication information is the second indication information, so that the user equipment can determine whether it is a paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the indication information can be successfully obtained, and when it is determined that it is a paged object or has a service, Subsequent processing such as accessing the network avoids waste of power consumption of the UE.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment receives the acquisition mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the user equipment according to the identifier information of the user equipment, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH is obtained, and the second indication information is obtained, where the second indication information is obtained.
  • the service for determining that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment includes:
  • the user equipment detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message;
  • the user equipment receives a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH according to the scheduling information, and determines, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the foregoing solution has the following technical effects: the flexibility of obtaining the indication information is improved by providing a plurality of optional acquisition manners for obtaining indication information for the paged object carried in the PDCCH.
  • the user equipment according to the user equipment The identifier information is used to decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, and the second indication information is obtained, including:
  • the user equipment searches for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, and uses the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquires the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or Or emergency service instructions.
  • the DCI format may carry information for indicating system information change, emergency service, etc., and expands the role of the DCI format, so that the UE can know in time and accurately. Corresponding instructions.
  • any one of the first to the fifth aspect of the first aspect in a sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
  • the user equipment sends a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
  • the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information save request.
  • the base station after determining that the UE does not perform data transmission for a certain period of time, the base station sends indication information indicating that the context information is saved to the UE, so that the storage timing of the context information matches the actual data transmission situation of the UE. It ensures the accuracy and reliability of the context information saving operation.
  • the user equipment receives the first sent by the base station Instructing information, and saving context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, including:
  • the user equipment saves, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security key includes encryption and/or integrity Sexual protection key;
  • the method further includes:
  • Determining, by the user equipment, a radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and using the security key and the The data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the user equipment performs a target by using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored
  • the data transmission of the radio bearer includes:
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment sends the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource that is allocated in advance by the user equipment when it is determined that the uplink data needs to be sent.
  • the user equipment performs, by using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored,
  • the data transmission of the radio bearer includes:
  • the user equipment When determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment decrypts the received downlink data by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the method further includes:
  • the UE saves the security key and the data packet counter of the plurality of radio bearers according to the first indication information, so that when the UE determines that the service data needs to be transmitted according to the second indication information, the UE can perform the saving information according to the saved information. Secure and reliable transmission of uplink data and downlink data.
  • the user equipment according to the user is used to decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, and the second indication information is obtained, including:
  • the user equipment decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquires N second indication information that the base station continuously sends on a PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO .
  • the paging reliability of the base station is ensured by transmitting the second indication information for indicating whether the UE is the paged object or whether there is a service, that is, the UE can determine itself more accurately. Whether it is a paged object or a service, so that the triggering of subsequent data transmission is more accurate and reliable.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment receives downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the base station, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and downlink data is received, where m is greater than or An integer equal to 0;
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment receives the downlink data according to the downlink data receiving opportunity configuration information.
  • the foregoing solution has the following technical effects: based on the method of transmitting the second indication information multiple times, the UE can directly perform the reliable result of the downlink data according to the downlink data receiving timing configuration information allocated by the base station for receiving the downlink data.
  • the user equipment according to the user After the identifier information of the device is decoded, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH is obtained, and after the second indication information is obtained, the method further includes:
  • the user equipment sends the acquisition feedback information to the base station by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, where the acquisition feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully obtains the second indication information.
  • the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the base station according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the foregoing solution has the following technical effects: based on the feedback mechanism, the UE feeds back the base station in time after obtaining the second indication information, so that the resources allocated by the base station for the UE are more reliable and avoid waste.
  • the user equipment determines the user After the device is a paged object or has the service of the user equipment, the device further includes:
  • the user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the method before the user equipment sends the RRC connection request message to the base station, the method further includes:
  • the user equipment receives the resource configuration information sent by the base station, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
  • the user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, including:
  • the user equipment sends the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  • the method before the user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, the method further includes:
  • the user equipment sends a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource
  • the user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, including:
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • the foregoing solution has the following technical effects: when the UE has uplink data or downlink data needs to be transmitted, the RRC connection request message is sent to recover the data transmission, and the UE obtains the data for transmission.
  • the resource that sends the RRC connection request message may request the base station to allocate resources to send the RRC connection request message through the resources allocated by the base station.
  • the RRC connection request message may also be sent in a contentive manner based on the CB-PUSCH resources allocated by the base station. Either way, the waste of resources allocated to the UE is avoided.
  • a second aspect of the present invention provides a data transmission processing method, where the method is performed by a base station, and the method includes:
  • the base station sends the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the user equipment included in the context information Identification information;
  • the base station sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines that the user equipment is when the second indicator information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment.
  • the object being paged or having the service of the user equipment.
  • the second indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format in;
  • the identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station sends the acquisition mode indication information to the user equipment, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • a third acquiring manner detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication interest.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • the base station sends the first to the user equipment Instructions, including:
  • the base station When the base station determines that the user equipment does not need to transmit data within a preset time, the base station saves the context information, and sends the first indication information to the user equipment.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate The user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. After the service, determining the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and performing data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered, the security key including encryption and / or integrity protection key.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station Receiving, by the base station, the uplink data sent by the user equipment, where the uplink data is generated by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that the uplink data needs to be sent. Encrypting a key stream, using the encrypted key stream to encrypt and transmit the uplink data.
  • the seventh possible implementation in the second aspect in the method, further includes:
  • the base station sends a contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource to the user equipment, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to indicate that the user equipment sends the uplink data according to the CB-PUSCH resource in a contentive manner. .
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station sends downlink data to the user equipment, so that when determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received station. Describe the downlink data.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station sends the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored to the user equipment, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to indicate that the user equipment determines the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  • the base station sends the second indication information by using a PDCCH include:
  • the method before the sending, by the eNB, the second indication information by using the PDCCH, the method further includes:
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station Receiving, by the base station, the acquisition feedback information sent by the user equipment by using an uplink feedback resource, where The obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully acquires the second indication information.
  • the base station before the receiving, by the base station, the acquiring feedback information that is sent by the user equipment by using an uplink feedback resource, :
  • the base station sends the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station receives an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station sends resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
  • the base station receives an RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  • the method further includes:
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • a third aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station
  • a saving module configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment;
  • An acquiring module configured to decode a physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, to obtain second indication information;
  • a determining module configured to determine, when the acquiring module acquires the second indication information, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the acquiring module includes:
  • a first obtaining submodule configured to correctly decode downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station Determining that the second indication information is obtained;
  • the obtaining module includes:
  • a second acquiring sub-module configured to decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station, and acquire the DCI in the PDCCH
  • the second indication information included in the format.
  • the receiving module is further configured to:
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the acquiring module include:
  • a third acquiring submodule configured to detect the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message;
  • a fourth obtaining submodule configured to receive, according to the scheduling information, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH;
  • the determining module is further configured to determine, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the acquiring module is specifically configured to:
  • Searching for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS using the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or Or emergency service instructions.
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a sending module configured to send a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
  • the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information save request.
  • the saving module is further configured to:
  • the determining module is further configured to: determine a radio bearer that needs to be restored;
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a processing module configured to perform, by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the processing module is configured to:
  • the sending module is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
  • the sending module is further configured to: pre-determine according to the base station when determining that uplink data needs to be sent
  • the allocated contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resources transmit the uplink data in a contentive manner.
  • the processing module is further configured to:
  • the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the receiving module is further configured to: receive the base station The radio bearer identifier to be recovered that needs to be recovered;
  • the determining module is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be restored.
  • the acquiring module is further configured to:
  • the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
  • the receiving module is further configured to:
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or the base station corresponds to the user equipment
  • the PO determines the uplink subframe.
  • the sending module is further used :
  • RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the receiving module is further configured to:
  • resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the sending module is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource;
  • the receiving module is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station;
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the SR resource includes an acquisition feedback message for successfully acquiring the second indication information.
  • a fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a sending module configured to send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes Identification information of the user equipment;
  • the sending module is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines, when the second indication information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment,
  • the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format
  • the identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • any one of the first to third aspects of the fourth aspect in combination with the fourth aspect, any one of the first to third aspects of the fourth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes:
  • a receiving module configured to receive a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the context information saving request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time period;
  • a determining module configured to determine, according to the context information saving request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time
  • the first indication information is used to indicate The user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. After the service, determining the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and performing data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered, the security key including encryption and / or integrity protection key.
  • the receiving module is further configured to:
  • the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • Radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the receiving module is further configured to:
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the receiving module is further configured to:
  • RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC The connection re-establishment request message.
  • the sending module is further configured to:
  • the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
  • the receiving module is further configured to:
  • the receiving module is further configured to: receive a resource request that is sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
  • the sending module is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment;
  • the receiving module is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
  • a receiver configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station
  • a processor configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment;
  • the processor is further configured to: decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquire second indication information;
  • the processor is further configured to: when the acquiring module acquires the second indication information, determine that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the receiver is further configured to:
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the second indication information is scheduling information of a paging message
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • Searching for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS using the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes a system information change indication Information and/or emergency service instructions.
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a transmitter configured to send a context information save request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
  • the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information saving request.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the processor is further configured to: determine a radio bearer that needs to be restored;
  • the processor is further configured to perform data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered by using the security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the transmitter is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: pre-determine according to the base station when determining that uplink data needs to be sent
  • the allocated contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resources transmit the uplink data in a contentive manner.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the receiver is further configured to: receive the base station The radio bearer identifier to be recovered that needs to be recovered;
  • the processor is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be restored.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
  • the receiver is further configured to:
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or the base station is configured according to the user equipment The PO determines the uplink subframe.
  • any one of the first to the sixteenth aspects of the fifth aspect in the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the transmitter is further used :
  • RRC connection request message includes The RRC Connection Recovery Request message, or the RRC Connection Setup Request message, or the RRC Connection Reestablishment Request message.
  • the receiver is further configured to:
  • resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
  • the transmitter is also used to:
  • the transmitter is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource;
  • the receiver is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station;
  • the transmitter is also used to:
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • a sixth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a transmitter configured to send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information is included Identification information of the user equipment;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines, when the second indication information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment,
  • the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
  • the identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • the method further includes:
  • a receiver configured to receive a context information save request sent by the user equipment, where the context information save request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time;
  • a processor configured to determine, according to the context information save request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time; save the context information;
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the context information is saved, and the context saving indication information is sent to the user equipment.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate The user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. After the service, determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and use the security The full key and the data counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered perform data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, the security key containing an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
  • the receiver is further configured to:
  • the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • Radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the receiver is further configured to:
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the receiver is further configured to:
  • RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the transmitter is further configured to:
  • the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
  • the receiver is also used to:
  • the receiver is further configured to: receive a resource request that is sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
  • the transmitter is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment;
  • the receiver is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • the data transmission processing method, the user equipment, and the base station are provided by the user equipment, after receiving the first indication information sent by the base station, the user equipment saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the user equipment. Identification information. Further, the user equipment decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information, and if the second indication information indicating that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment can be decoded, the user equipment is a paged object or has a service requirement. Transfer.
  • the user equipment can determine whether it is the paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the indication information can be successfully obtained, and determine that it is the paged object or When there is a service, subsequent processing such as accessing the network is performed, thereby avoiding waste of power consumption of the UE.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Embodiment 2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Embodiment 4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is an interaction diagram of Embodiment 10 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • an execution entity of the solution is a user equipment (UE), and the data transmission processing method includes the following steps:
  • Step 101 The UE receives the first indication information sent by the eNB, and saves the context information of the UE according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the UE.
  • the eNB sends the first indication information to the UE when determining that the UE does not perform data transmission within a preset time.
  • the eNB may determine whether the UE performs data transmission within a preset time by using an optional manner as follows:
  • the first mode in the process of data transmission with the network, if after completing a current data transmission, there is no data to be transmitted later, that is, data that does not need to be transmitted within a preset time.
  • the eNB sends a context information save request to the eNB to save the context information of the UE, that is, request the eNB to save the context information of the UE.
  • the first indication information is sent by the eNB according to the context information saving request, that is, when the eNB receives the context information saving request, determining that the UE does not need to continue to transmit data within the time, the eNB may send the data to the UE.
  • the context saving indication message carries the first indication information in the context saving indication message.
  • the preservation of the UE context information refers to the eNB on the UE side and the network side. Both save the context information.
  • the foregoing context information saving request may also be referred to as an RRC connection suspension request message, etc.
  • the context information saving indication message carrying the first indication information may also be referred to as an RRC connection suspension indication message, an RRC connection. Release the indication message, etc., without specific restrictions.
  • the second mode the first indication information is sent by the eNB according to the data transmission record with the UE, when it is determined that the data transmission is not performed with the UE within a preset time.
  • the eNB may also determine, according to the case of performing data transmission with the UE, that the UE does not need data to continue to transmit, and autonomously determines that the context information of the UE may be saved (or equivalently referred to as suspension of the RRC connection or Release), thereby transmitting the above first indication information to the UE.
  • the eNB after determining that the UE does not transmit data for a certain period of time, the eNB does not immediately send the first indication information to the UE, but needs to interact with the core network device: MME and SGW to complete related processing on the network side, for example, The pending processing of the bearer of the UE is sent to the UE after the relevant processing is completed.
  • MME and SGW the core network device
  • the UE after receiving the first indication information sent by the eNB, the UE performs saving context information.
  • the context information may include one or more of radio resource configuration information, security algorithms, UE identifiers, or UE identification information, measurement configuration information, and the like of the UE.
  • the radio resource configuration information may include one or more of physical layer configuration information, MAC layer configuration information, RLC layer configuration information, and PDCP layer configuration information.
  • the identifier information of the UE includes, for example, a C-RNTI.
  • the foregoing first indication information is generally sent based on the following communication scenario: after the UE uses the context information to communicate with the base station, if there is no subsequent data transmission within a certain period of time, the RRC connection state may enter the RRC idle state. State and delete context information.
  • the base station may instruct the UE to save the context information after determining that the UE does not perform data transmission within a certain period of time.
  • the state of the UE is not specifically limited, and may be an RRC idle state.
  • the RRC connection state, the RRC suspension state, and the like may be used, so that when the PDCCH is received, the second indication information included in the PDCCH may be detected by using the user equipment identifier in the context information.
  • Step 102 The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires the second indication information.
  • Step 103 The UE determines that the UE is a paged object or has a service of the UE.
  • the identifier information of the UE may be used to uniquely identify the UE within its eNB or within one or more cell ranges of the eNB.
  • the PDCCH is scrambled by using the identification information of the UE to send the indication information.
  • the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the UE, and the second indication information is obtained, which can be implemented as follows:
  • Downlink Control Information Downlink Control Information, DCI
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the UE, and the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH is obtained.
  • the UE if the UE correctly decodes the preset downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH by using the identifier information, the UE indicates that the UE is a paged object or has a service, that is, an indication is obtained.
  • the UE is the second indication information of the paged object or the service; the bit definition of the second indication information may be added in the preset DCI format, if the UE uses the identifier information to decode the indication included in the DCI format in the PDCCH. If the UE is the paged object or the second indication information of the service, the UE is the paged object or has the service.
  • only one bit can be included in the DCI format. For example, when the bit is 1, it can indicate that the UE is paged, and needs to access the network for data transmission. When the bit is 0, it indicates that the UE is not currently being paged.
  • the UE may use the identifier information of the UE to decode the preset DCI format of the PDCCH by using the identifier information of the UE in the Common Search Space (CSS) or the UE-specific search space (UES). Two instructions.
  • CSS Common Search Space
  • UMS UE-specific search space
  • the DCI format may further include system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • system information change indication information Take the system information change indication information as an example.
  • the design of the DCI format can be:
  • the first bit paging indication information, used to notify whether there is a paging of the UE;
  • the second bit system information change indication information, used to notify whether the system information transmission change.
  • the DCI format may further include the following emergency service indication information, such as Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System Indication (ETWS), Commercial Mobile Alert Service (CMAS), and extended Extended Access Barring Parameter Modification (EABPM).
  • EWS Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System Indication
  • CMAS Commercial Mobile Alert Service
  • EABPM Extended Access Barring Parameter Modification
  • the UE after receiving the first indication information sent by the eNB, the UE saves the context information of the UE according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the UE. Further, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identification information, and if the second indication information indicating that the UE is a paged object or a service of the UE can be decoded, the UE is required to be a paged object or has a service to transmit.
  • the UE can determine whether it is the paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the indication information can be successfully obtained, and determine that it is the paged object or has During the service, the access network and other subsequent processing are performed to avoid waste of power consumption of the UE.
  • Embodiment 2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 201 The UE receives the first indication information sent by the eNB, and saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the user equipment.
  • Step 202 The UE saves a security key for performing data transmission between the UE and the eNB according to the first indication information, and a data packet counter of the at least one radio bearer.
  • the security key contains an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
  • the UE in addition to saving context information, the UE also stores the above-mentioned security key and packet counter, or is called a packet sequence number.
  • the packet counter may be a packet counter of a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), that is, a PDCP COUNT.
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • the PDCP COUNT format is as follows:
  • the COUNT value is composed of HFN (Hyper Frame Number) and PDCP SN (Sequence Number):
  • the type of the counter adapts.
  • Method 1 Save the next packet counter to be used. For example, if the data transmission is transmitted to the No. 5 data packet, then the number of 6 is saved when it is saved, and is used when the data transmission is resumed next.
  • Method 2 Save the last valid packet counter that has been used. For example, the data packet transmission is transmitted to the No. 5 data packet. At this time, the 5 count is saved, and the next time it is used, it is incremented by 1 and used from 6.
  • Step 203 The UE receives the acquisition mode indication information sent by the eNB.
  • the obtaining mode indication information is used to indicate that the UE acquires the acquiring manner of the second indication information.
  • the timing of this step 203 is not strictly limited and is not limited to the timing relationship in this embodiment.
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following manners:
  • the UE acquires the second indication information by correctly decoding a DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE that is identified in the eNB or the one or more cell ranges of the eNB;
  • a second acquisition mode the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE that is identified in the eNB or the one or more cell ranges of the base station, and acquires the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH.
  • the third acquiring mode is: the UE detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquires the second indication information.
  • the identifier information of the UE mainly refers to the C-RNTI, which is used to uniquely identify the UE.
  • the P-RNTI is not uniquely identified by the UE, and belongs to the shared identifier information.
  • Step 204 The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires the second indication information, when the acquiring mode indication information indicates that the acquiring mode is the first acquiring mode or the second acquiring mode.
  • the UE detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message, and further, the UE according to the scheduling information.
  • a paging message corresponding to the UE is received from the PDSCH, and the UE is determined to be a paged object or a service of the UE according to the paging message.
  • the scheduling information refers to the PDSCH connection. Time-frequency resources for receiving paging messages.
  • Step 205 The UE determines, according to the second indication information, that the UE is a paged object or a service of the UE.
  • Step 206 The UE receives the radio bearer identifier that is sent by the eNB and needs to be restored, and determines the radio bearer that needs to be restored according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  • the radio bearer identifier may be included in the second indication information or may also be included in a paging message.
  • Step 207 The UE performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered by using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored.
  • the method of specifically performing data transmission corresponds to the above two methods of saving, and there are two ways:
  • Method 1 Corresponding to Method 1, starting with the saved 6.
  • Method 2 Corresponding to Method 2, start using the saved 5 plus one.
  • the eNB determines the corresponding radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored according to the service processing that needs to be performed, and then sends the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored to the UE, so that the UE needs
  • the recovered radio bearer identifier determines the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and then performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered using the saved security key and the saved packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered.
  • the UE when the UE has uplink data to be transmitted, the UE performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be restored, including: generating a cipher key stream by using a security key and a packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored, using the The encrypted key stream encrypts the uplink data and sends it to the eNB.
  • the UE transmits the uplink data to the encrypted uplink data in a contentive manner according to a contention-based physical uplink shared channel (CB-PUSCH) resource allocated in advance by the eNB.
  • CB-PUSCH contention-based physical uplink shared channel
  • the received downlink data is decrypted using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered.
  • the UE After the UE obtains the second indication information indicating that the UE is the paged object or has the service, it indicates that the UE has downlink data to be received, and triggers the processing of receiving the downlink data. If the UE needs to send uplink data in the process, the process of sending the uplink data is triggered.
  • the UE can enable the UE to determine whether it is a paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the second indication information can be successfully obtained, and perform data transmission processing when determining that it is a paged object or has a service, thereby avoiding the UE. Waste of power consumption.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains the second indication information. This can be achieved by the following step 301:
  • Step 301 The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires N pieces of second indication information that are continuously sent by the eNB on one PO corresponding to the UE and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO.
  • the UE may decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtain the second indication information, which may also be implemented as follows:
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the method further includes the following steps of receiving downlink data:
  • Step 302 The UE receives the downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the eNB, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that the downlink data is received after the m subframes after the second indication information is acquired.
  • Step 303 The UE receives the downlink data according to the downlink data receiving timing configuration information.
  • n is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • the UE in order to ensure paging reliability, that is, the UE can determine whether it is a paged object or has a service more accurately, so that the triggering of subsequent data transmission is more accurate and reliable, and multiple transmissions are provided for indication. Whether the UE is the object to be paged or whether there is a second indication information of the service.
  • the eNB may directly send downlink data to the UE.
  • the sending of the Nth second indication information may be consecutively sent or may be discontinuously sent.
  • the eNB calculates one PO corresponding to the UE, and continuously sends N second indication information on the PO and the N-1 consecutive subframes after the PO, specifically, the identifier information of the UE.
  • the scrambled PDCCH sends the preset DCI format carrying the second indication information N times, or sends the preset DCI format N times, and after sending N times, Send downlink data directly to the UE.
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires N pieces of second indication information that are continuously sent by the eNB after the PO corresponding to the UE and the consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO, and then attempts to receive the downlink data.
  • the timing at which the eNB sends the downlink data may be after the m subframes after the N times of the second indication information are continuously sent, and correspondingly, after the UE obtains the N times of the second indication information, After the sub-frames, the downlink data is received.
  • the eNB calculates N different POs corresponding to the UE, and sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH in each PO.
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains any one of the second indication information that is sent by the eNB on the N different POs corresponding to the UE, and then attempts to receive the downlink data. In this manner, since the UE does not know that the indication information obtained by the UE is the first time sent by the eNB, the UE attempts to receive the downlink data after obtaining the second indication information.
  • the UE determines that it is a paged object or has a service, if there is downlink data to be received, that is, if the second indication information is received, the UE has downlink data to be received, the UE is The downlink data can be directly received according to the manner in this embodiment. If the UE has uplink data to be transmitted, the UE generally needs to request resources from the eNB to perform uplink data transmission according to resources allocated by the eNB. This involves the processing of data transfer recovery, which will be explained in detail in subsequent embodiments. For the process of receiving the downlink data and the process of transmitting the uplink data, reference may be made to the specific description in the embodiment of FIG. 2.
  • the downlink data reception also triggers the data transmission recovery process.
  • the eNB may send the downlink data immediately after the Nth second indication information is sent, based on the two optional second indication information transmission manners.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4, based on the foregoing embodiments, the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and the UE is based on the UE. After the identifier information is decoded into the PDCCH, and the second indication information is obtained, the following steps may be further included:
  • Step 401 The UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, where the acquisition feedback information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information.
  • Step 402 The UE receives resource configuration information sent by the eNB.
  • Step 403 The UE sends an RRC connection request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
  • the UE resumes data transmission by using an RRC connection setup, an RRC connection re-establishment, and an RRC connection recovery process, in order to recover the data transmission.
  • the UE needs to send an RRC connection request message to the eNB, and correspondingly,
  • the RRC Connection Request message includes an RRC Connection Recovery Request message, or an RRC Connection Setup Request message, or an RRC Connection Re-establishment Request message.
  • the RRC connection request message needs to use the corresponding resource. Therefore, the eNB needs to allocate the resource to the UE for the UE to perform the RRC connection request message transmission.
  • the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB by using the uplink feedback resource obtained in advance, and the acquisition feedback is obtained.
  • the information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information.
  • the UE allocates resources to the UE, and sends resource configuration information to the UE, so that the UE sends an RRC connection request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
  • the uplink feedback resource includes an SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the eNB according to the PO corresponding to the UE.
  • the eNB configures a resource on the xth uplink subframe after a certain PO corresponding to the UE.
  • the resource may transmit a physical layer signal, similar to the current ACK/NACK feedback, or may feed back a high-level message indicating whether the second indication information is successfully received or not.
  • the uplink feedback resource is a UE-specific resource, because the eNB can learn a certain PO, which UEs are paged or possibly paged, and the eNB stores the context information of the UEs. Therefore, the eNB UE-specific resources may be allocated for UEs that are paged on the PO.
  • the UE-specific resource is a UE that performs feedback for the eNB to be unambiguously identified, so that the UE that has received the indication information can be determined unambiguously.
  • the eNB when the PO of a certain UE is used, the eNB does not actually send the paging of the UE.
  • the UE may only allocate dedicated resources for the UE that actually sends the paging, and secondly, in order to reduce the number of times the UE feeds back, the UE may only feedback after it successfully receives the paging, that is, the second indication information for the UE, and does not receive the received information. In the case of no feedback, even if the network sends the indication information of the UE, and the dedicated resources are allocated for the feedback of the UE.
  • the UE performs feedback on the uplink feedback resource configured according to whether the second indication information is successfully obtained. If the second indication information of the UE is successfully obtained, the feedback is successful, otherwise the feedback fails, or no feedback.
  • the manner in which the eNB allocates the request resource after the eNB obtains the feedback information is particularly applicable to the case that the eNB has the downlink data to be sent to the UE, and if the UE has the uplink data to be sent to the eNB, the eNB may also have the following optional the way:
  • the UE sends a resource request to the eNB by using the SR resource, where the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted;
  • the UE sends an RRC Connection Request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
  • the method is configured to send the indication information to the eNB by using the SR resource.
  • the UE is configured with a periodic SR resource, where the SR resource is used to request resources from the eNB, and the received feedback information and the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted. It can be understood as the reason for informing the eNB to request a resource.
  • the UE when the UE obtains the second indication information by decoding the PDCCH, and determines that it is the paged object or the service according to the second indication information, the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB to inform the eNB that the second indication has been successfully obtained.
  • the information is such that the eNB allocates resources used by the RRC connection request message to the UE to restore data transmission more targeted and avoid waste of allocated resources.
  • the indication information is sent through the PDCCH multiple times to avoid waste of resources used for transmitting the RRC connection request message by improving the paging reliability.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 is controlled by the control.
  • the timing of the resource avoids the waste of the allocated resources.
  • another scheme for avoiding resource waste is provided from the perspective of assigning a specific allocation manner of the resource.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 5, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, after the step 103, the method may further include:
  • Step 501 The UE receives the resource configuration information that is sent by the eNB, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource that is determined according to a PO corresponding to the UE and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
  • Step 502 The UE sends an RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  • the RRC connection request message is based on the CB-PUSCH mode: a resource configuration for defining a CB-PUSCH and a transmission resource for transmitting a second indication information indicating whether the UE is a paged object or whether there is a service, such as The relationship between paging moments PO.
  • the eNB defines X available CB-PUSCH resources, so that the eNB can perform the contention transmission of the maximum X times RRC connection request message before the eNB sends the second indication information again.
  • the CB-PUSCH resource is configured between the PO corresponding to the UE and the at least one PO, so that the UE performs the contention of the RRC connection request message only on the CB-PUSCH resource, and reduces the CB. - Waste of PUSCH resources.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the execution entity of the embodiment is a base station (eNB). As shown in FIG. 6, the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 601 The eNB sends the first indication information to the UE, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the UE saves the context information of the UE and the identifier information of the UE included in the context information according to the first indication information.
  • Step 602 The eNB sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the UE determines that the UE is the paged object or the service of the UE when the PDCCH is used to obtain the second indication information according to the identifier information of the UE.
  • the eNB may determine whether the UE performs data transmission within a preset time by using the following manner: when the data transmission is not performed, sending the first indication information:
  • the system determines that the UE does not perform data transmission within a preset time according to the context information saving request, saves the context information of the UE, and sends the first indication information to the UE.
  • the eNB may also be based on the data transmission record with the UE, and send the first indication information when it is determined that the data transmission is not performed with the UE within a preset time.
  • the MME notifies the eNB to initiate paging to the UE, and then the eNB sends a message to the UE by using the PDCCH to indicate that the UE is the paged object or has The second indication of the service.
  • the sending, by the eNB, the second indication information may be sent by using the PDCCH in the preset DCI format, or sending the second indication information by using a PDCCH to send a preset DCI format.
  • the PDCCH is scrambled by using the identifier information of the UE.
  • the identifier information of the UE may be, for example, a C-RNTI or a P-RNTI.
  • the identifier information of the UE in this embodiment refers to an identifier, such as a C-RNTI, for uniquely identifying a UE within a range of eNBs covering the UE or within one or more cells of the eNB.
  • the UE After the eNB sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to its own identification information, so as to determine that it is a paged object or has a service according to the second indication information.
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains the second indication information, which can be implemented by:
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH.
  • the UE correctly decodes the preset DCI format in the PDCCH with its identification information it indicates that the UE is a paged object or has a service, that is, the UE is instructed to be Paging the second indication information of the object or the service; or adding the bit definition of the second indication information to the preset DCI format, if the UE uses the identification information to decode the indication UE included in the preset DCI format in the PDCCH
  • the second indication information of the paged object or the service indicates that the UE is a paged object or has a service.
  • the eNB may include system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information in addition to the second indication information in the DCI format, to inform the UE that the system information is sent, or what specific emergency service information is available. .
  • the eNB further configures the acquiring manner of the foregoing second indication information for the UE, and specifically includes the following steps:
  • Step 603 The eNB sends the acquisition mode indication information to the UE, where the acquisition mode indication information is used.
  • the method for obtaining the second indication information is obtained by the UE.
  • This step 603 does not have a strict timing constraint relationship with the aforementioned step 601.
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following manners:
  • the first obtaining mode is: acquiring the second indication information by correctly decoding the DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE that is identified in the eNB or the one or more cell ranges of the eNB;
  • the second obtaining mode is: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the UE in the range of the eNB or the one or more cells of the eNB, and acquiring the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the identification information of the UE mainly refers to the C-RNTI, which is used to uniquely identify the UE.
  • the P-RNTI is not uniquely identified by the UE, and belongs to the shared identification information.
  • the eNB may configure a specific acquisition mode for the UE according to the processing capability of the UE. For example, when the processing capability of the UE is high, the third acquisition mode is configured. Otherwise, the first two acquisition modes are configured.
  • the UE When receiving the acquisition mode indication information, the UE obtains the second indication information according to the identifier information of the UE, such as the C-RNTI, to decode the PDCCH.
  • the acquisition mode indication information indicates the third acquisition mode, the UE detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message, and further, the UE according to the scheduling information.
  • a paging message corresponding to the UE is received from the PDSCH, and the UE is determined to be a paged object or a service of the UE according to the paging message.
  • the eNB when the eNB is paging the UE, the eNB sends a second indication information indicating whether the UE is a paged object or has a service, so that the UE decodes the PDCCH according to its own identification information, and obtains the second indication information.
  • the UE can accurately determine whether it is a paged object or has a service. If yes, the UE performs subsequent data transmission processing. Otherwise, subsequent processing is not triggered, thereby avoiding waste of power consumption of the UE.
  • the UE after the eNB sends the first indication information to the UE, the UE not only performs the process of saving the context information, but also the security key for performing data transmission between the UE and the eNB and the data packet counter of the at least one radio bearer.
  • the UE determines, according to the second indication information, that the UE is a paged object or has a UE. Thereafter, the radio bearer that needs to be recovered is also determined, and the data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered is performed using the saved security key and the packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the security key contains an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
  • the UE after determining that the UE is a paged object or a service of the UE, the UE triggers a process of data transmission recovery to receive downlink data of the service or send uplink data.
  • the eNB In order for the UE to know which radio bearer should be recovered, the eNB also needs to perform the following process as shown in FIG. 7:
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the execution body of the embodiment is a base station (eNB).
  • eNB base station
  • step 602 is performed. After that, the method may further include the following steps:
  • Step 701 The eNB sends a radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored to the UE, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the UE to determine the radio bearer that needs to be restored according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  • the radio bearer identifier may be included in the second indication information or may also be included in a paging message.
  • the eNB For the case of transmitting downlink data to the UE, the eNB knows the radio bearer identifier corresponding to the downlink data, so that the radio bearer identifier is sent to the UE to inform the UE which radio bearer needs to be recovered.
  • step 702 is performed; and in the case where the UE transmits uplink data to the eNB, step 703 and step 704 are performed:
  • Step 702 The eNB sends downlink data to the UE, so that when determining that the downlink data needs to be received, the UE uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received downlink data.
  • Step 703 The eNB sends a CB-PUSCH resource to the UE, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to instruct the UE to send uplink data according to the CB-PUSCH resource in a contention manner.
  • Step 704 The eNB receives uplink data sent by the UE.
  • the uplink data is generated by the UE using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored when the uplink data needs to be sent, and the encrypted data stream is encrypted by using the encryption key stream.
  • the UE when the UE sends the uplink data, the UE knows the radio bearer corresponding to the uplink data, and restores the radio bearer.
  • the eNB When transmitting uplink data, the eNB can be used in advance.
  • the allocated CB-PUSCH resource transmits uplink data by means of contention transmission.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the execution body of the embodiment is a base station (eNB), as shown in FIG. 8, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • eNB base station
  • the sending of the second indication information by using the PDCCH may be implemented by the following steps:
  • Step 801 The eNB sends downlink data reception timing configuration information to the UE, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that the downlink data is received after obtaining the second indication information.
  • n is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
  • Step 802 The eNB continuously sends N pieces of second indication information on a PO corresponding to the UE and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO by using the PDCCH.
  • the eNB may separately send the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the UE by using the PDCCH.
  • the UE in order to ensure paging reliability, that is, the UE can determine whether it is a paged object or has a service more accurately, so that the triggering of subsequent data transmission is more accurate and reliable, and multiple transmissions are provided for indication. Whether the UE is a paged object or a scheme of whether or not there is indication of a service.
  • the eNB may directly send downlink data to the UE.
  • the sending of the Nth second indication information may be consecutively sent or may be discontinuously sent.
  • the eNB calculates one PO corresponding to the UE, and continuously sends N second indication information on the PO and the N-1 consecutive subframes after the PO, specifically, the identifier information of the UE.
  • the scrambled PDCCH is sent N times to carry the preset DCI format with the second indication information, or the NDP format is sent N times, and after the N times, the downlink data can be directly sent to the UE.
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires N pieces of second indication information that are continuously sent by the eNB after the PO corresponding to the UE and the consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO, and then attempts to receive the downlink data.
  • the timing at which the eNB sends downlink data may be continuous.
  • the eNB informs the UE of the timing of transmitting the downlink data, that is, the timing at which the UE receives the downlink data.
  • the UE receives the downlink data.
  • the eNB calculates N different POs corresponding to the UE, and sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH in each PO.
  • the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains any one of the second indication information that is sent by the eNB on the N different POs corresponding to the UE, and then attempts to receive the downlink data. In this manner, since the UE does not know that the second indication information obtained by the UE is the first time sent by the eNB, the UE attempts to receive the downlink data after obtaining the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is sent multiple times to ensure that the UE can reliably receive the paging of the eNB, so that subsequent data transmission is more reliable, and waste of resources such as UE power consumption is avoided.
  • the UE is more reliable to receive the paging of the eNB, and the waste of resources such as the power consumption of the UE is avoided.
  • the data transmission is performed in combination with the embodiment shown in FIG. In the recovery perspective, when the data transmission is resumed, the resource allocation angle of the RRC connection request message is sent, and the resource is more accurately and reliably allocated, thereby further avoiding waste of resources for transmitting the RRC connection request message.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a ninth embodiment of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 9, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, after step 602, the following steps may be further included:
  • Step 901 The eNB sends the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the UE, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes an SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the UE.
  • Step 902 The eNB receives the acquiring feedback information that is sent by the UE by using the uplink feedback resource, and the acquiring the feedback information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information.
  • the UE when it determines that it is a paged object or has a service, it needs to perform data transmission recovery processing to perform subsequent data transmission processing such as uplink data transmission and downlink data reception.
  • RRC connection request message needs to be sent to the eNB, and the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message or an RRC connection establishment request message, or The RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the RRC connection request message needs to use the corresponding resource. Therefore, the eNB needs to allocate the resource to the UE for the UE to perform the RRC connection request message transmission.
  • the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB by using the uplink feedback resource obtained in advance, and the acquisition feedback is obtained.
  • the information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information.
  • the UE allocates resources to the UE, and sends resource configuration information to the UE, so that the UE sends an RRC connection request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
  • the uplink feedback resource includes an SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the eNB according to the PO corresponding to the UE.
  • the eNB configures a resource on the xth uplink subframe after a certain PO corresponding to the UE.
  • the resource may transmit a physical layer signal, similar to the current ACK/NACK feedback, or may feed back a high-level message indicating whether the second indication information is successfully received or not.
  • Step 903 The eNB sends resource configuration information to the UE, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the UE and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
  • Step 904 The eNB receives an RRC connection request message that is sent by the UE according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  • the request resource allocated by the eNB to the UE may include, by the eNB, determining, according to the PO corresponding to the UE, the next one or more POs adjacent to the PO. CB-PUSCH resources. Therefore, the UE transmits the RRC connection request message in a contention manner using the CB-PUSCH resource.
  • the RRC connection request message is based on the CB-PUSCH mode: a resource configuration for defining a CB-PUSCH and a transmission resource for transmitting a second indication information indicating whether the UE is a paged object or whether there is a service, such as The relationship between paging moments PO.
  • the eNB defines X available CB-PUSCH resources. Before the eNB sends the second indication information again, the UE may be guaranteed to perform the contention transmission of the maximum X times RRC connection request message.
  • the above feedback mechanism is especially applicable to the case where the eNB has downlink data to be transmitted.
  • the UE may actively request allocation of resources to the eNB for transmitting the RRC connection request message when there is uplink data to be sent.
  • the following allocation process may be included:
  • the eNB receives the resource request sent by the UE through the SR resource, where the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted;
  • the eNB sends resource configuration information to the UE;
  • the eNB receives an RRC connection request message that is sent by the UE according to the resource configuration information.
  • the method is configured to send the indication information to the eNB by using the SR resource.
  • the UE is configured with a periodic SR resource, where the SR resource is used to request resources from the eNB, and the received feedback information and the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted. It can be understood as the reason for informing the eNB to request a resource.
  • the UE when the UE obtains the indication information by decoding the PDCCH, and determines that the user is the paged object or has the service according to the second indication information, the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB to inform the eNB that the second indication information has been successfully obtained. Therefore, the eNB allocates the resources used by the eNB to send the RRC connection request message, so as to restore the data transmission more targeted, and avoid waste of the allocated resources.
  • FIG. 10 is an interaction diagram of Embodiment 10 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 10, the method may include the following steps:
  • Step 1001 The UE performs data transmission with the eNB.
  • Step 1002 After a certain time, the UE determines that data that does not need to be transmitted is currently not continued.
  • Step 1003 The UE sends a context information save request to the eNB.
  • RRC suspend request to request to save the context information of the UE.
  • steps 1002 and 1003 are optional steps and are therefore indicated by dashed lines in the figure.
  • Step 1004 The eNB determines to save the context information of the UE, and saves the context information of the UE.
  • the eNB may determine that the context information of the UE may be saved when receiving the context information saving request sent by the UE.
  • the eNB may also determine, according to the case of performing data transmission with the UE, that the UE has not transmitted data within a certain period of time, and autonomously determines that the context information of the UE may be saved (or equivalently referred to as an RRC connection). Hang up).
  • Step 1005 The eNB sends a context information saving indication message of the UE to the MME.
  • a context information save request message or an RRC Connection Suspend Request message, or an RRC Connection Suspend Indication message, to inform the MME that the UE will be in a context information save state or an RRC connection suspend state.
  • Step 1006 The MME sends a UE bearer suspension indication message to the SGW.
  • the indication message is used to indicate that the bearer of the UE of the SGW is to be in a suspended state or to suspend the state of transmitting data.
  • the MME After receiving the UE context information saving indication message sent by the eNB, the MME determines that the UE is in the context information saving state or the RRC connection suspension state. Then, an indication message is sent to the SGW to indicate that the bearer of the UE of the SGW is to be in a suspended state, or to suspend the state of transmitting data.
  • Step 1007 The S-GW sends a bearer suspension confirmation message to the MME.
  • Step 1008 The MME sends a connection suspension confirmation message to the eNB.
  • Step 1009 The eNB sends a context information saving indication message to the UE.
  • the RRC connection release indication message which carries the context information storage indication information, that is, the first indication information, to command the UE to save the context information of the UE.
  • Step 1010 The UE saves context information.
  • the context information includes identification information of the UE.
  • Step 1011 The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and after obtaining the second indication information, determines that the UE is a paged object or has a service.
  • Step 1012 The UE interacts with the eNB to access the network.
  • Step 1013 The UE sends uplink data and/or receives downlink data.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 11
  • the user equipment includes: a receiving module 11, a saving module 12, an obtaining module 13, and a determining module 14.
  • the receiving module 11 is configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station.
  • the saving module 12 is configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment.
  • the obtaining module 13 is configured to decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquire second indication information.
  • the determining module 14 is configured to determine, when the acquiring module acquires the second indication information, that the user equipment is a paged object or has a service of the user equipment.
  • the user equipment further includes: a sending module 15.
  • the sending module 15 is configured to send a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
  • the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information saving request.
  • the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive the obtaining mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquiring mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquiring manner of the second indication information.
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the obtaining module 13 includes: a first obtaining submodule 131, or a second obtaining submodule 132, or a third obtaining submodule 133 and a fourth obtaining submodule 134.
  • the first obtaining sub-module 131 is configured to correctly decode the downlink control information DCI in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station.
  • the format determines that the second indication information is obtained.
  • a second obtaining sub-module 132 configured to decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station, and obtain the PDCCH The second indication information included in the DCI format.
  • the third obtaining sub-module 133 is configured to detect the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message.
  • the fourth obtaining sub-module 134 is configured to receive, according to the scheduling information, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH.
  • the determining module 14 is further configured to determine, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the obtaining module 13 is specifically configured to:
  • Searching for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS using the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 12, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, the saving module 12 is further configured to:
  • storing according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security key includes an encryption and/or integrity protection key .
  • the determining module 14 is further configured to: determine a radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the user equipment further includes: a processing module 21.
  • the processing module 21 is configured to perform data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • processing module 21 is configured to:
  • the security key and the packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered are used to generate an encryption key stream, and the uplink data is encrypted using the encryption key stream.
  • the sending module 15 is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
  • the sending module 15 is further configured to: when determining that the uplink data needs to be sent, send the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource that is pre-allocated by the base station.
  • processing module 21 is further configured to:
  • the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive, by the base station, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered.
  • the determining module 14 is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the obtaining module 13 is further configured to:
  • the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
  • the receiving module 11 is further configured to:
  • the sending module 15 is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the base station according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the sending module 15 is further configured to: send an RRC connection request message to the base station, where
  • the RRC Connection Request message includes an RRC Connection Recovery Request message, or an RRC Connection Setup Request message, or an RRC Connection Re-establishment Request message.
  • the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station, where the resource configuration information includes a next one or more POs that are adjacent to the PO according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment. Determined CB-PUSCH resources.
  • the sending module 15 is further configured to: send the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  • the sending module 15 is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource.
  • the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the sending module 15 is further configured to: send the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information.
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • the user equipment provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the user equipment in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 5, and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the user equipment includes: a receiver 31, a processor 32, and a transmitter 33.
  • the receiver 31 is configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station.
  • the processor 32 is configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to: decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, acquire the second indication information, and determine that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to correctly decode the downlink in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station. Controlling the information DCI format, determining to obtain the second indication information.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to: decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station, and obtain the PDCCH. And the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH is taken.
  • the receiver 31 is further configured to: receive the obtaining mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquiring mode indication information is used to instruct the user equipment to acquire the acquiring manner of the second indication information.
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to detect the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of a paging message, and according to the scheduling information, Receiving, by the paging message, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment, and determining, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to search a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, and use the identifier information of the user equipment to decode a DCI format of the PDCCH, and obtain the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • the transmitter 33 is configured to send a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
  • the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information save request.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to save, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security is performed.
  • the key contains an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to determine a radio bearer that needs to be restored;
  • the processor 32 is further configured to use the security key and the radio bearer that needs to be restored
  • the data packet counter performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to:
  • the security key and the packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered are used to generate an encryption key stream, and the uplink data is encrypted using the encryption key stream.
  • the transmitter 33 is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
  • the transmitter 33 is further configured to: when determining that the uplink data needs to be sent, send the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource that is pre-allocated by the base station.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to:
  • the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  • the receiver 31 is further configured to: receive, by the base station, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be restored.
  • the processor 32 is further configured to:
  • the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
  • the receiver 31 is further configured to:
  • the transmitter 33 is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the base station according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the transmitter 33 is further configured to:
  • RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the receiver 31 is further configured to:
  • resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
  • the transmitter 33 is also used to:
  • the sender 33 is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource.
  • the receiver 31 is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the transmitter 33 is further configured to: send the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information.
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • the user equipment provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the user equipment in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 5 , and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 14, the base station includes: a determining module 41 and a sending module 42.
  • the determining module 41 is configured to determine whether the user equipment performs data transmission within a preset time.
  • the sending module 42 is configured to: when the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time, send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to instruct the user equipment to save the user according to the first indication information.
  • Context information of the device the use included in the context information Identification information of the household device.
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment, when decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, acquires the second indication information, Determining that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
  • the identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • the base station further includes: a receiving module 43 and a saving module 44.
  • the receiving module 43 is configured to receive a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the context information saving request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time.
  • the determining module 41 is specifically configured to determine, according to the context information saving request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time.
  • the saving module 44 is configured to save the context information.
  • the determining module 41 determines that the user equipment does not need to transmit within a preset time.
  • the triggering save module 44 saves the context information, and triggers the sending module 11 to send the first indication information to the user equipment.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determining the After the user equipment is the paged object or the service of the user equipment, determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and perform the recovery for the need by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored.
  • Radio bearer data transmission, the security key containing an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
  • the receiving module 43 is further configured to:
  • the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • Radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • the receiving module 43 is further configured to:
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the receiving module 43 is further configured to:
  • RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to:
  • the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
  • the receiving module 43 is further configured to:
  • the receiving module 43 is further configured to: receive a resource request sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
  • the sending module 42 is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment;
  • the receiving module 43 is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 10, and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station includes: a transmitter 51, a processor 52, and a receiver 53.
  • the sender 51 is configured to send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes The identification information of the user equipment.
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment, when decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, acquires the second indication information, Determining that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  • the indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
  • the identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • the obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
  • the first acquisition mode correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
  • a second acquiring manner decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
  • the third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  • the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  • the receiver 53 is configured to receive a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the The information save request is sent when the user equipment does not need to transmit data within a preset time.
  • the processor 52 is further configured to: determine, according to the context information save request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time; and save the context information.
  • the processor 52 is further configured to: save the context information when determining that the user equipment does not need to transmit data within a preset time.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determining the After the user equipment is the paged object or the service of the user equipment, determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and perform the recovery for the need by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored.
  • Radio bearer data transmission, the security key containing an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
  • the receiver 53 is further configured to:
  • the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • Radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • the receiver 53 is further configured to:
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  • the receiver 53 is further configured to:
  • RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
  • Resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
  • the receiver 53 is also used to:
  • the receiver 53 is further configured to: receive a resource request sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource.
  • the transmitter 51 is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment.
  • the receiver 53 is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information.
  • the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 10, and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (English: Central Processing Unit, CPU for short), or may be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (English: Digital) Signal Processor (DSP), Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), etc.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the aforementioned program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the steps including the foregoing method embodiments are performed; and the foregoing storage medium includes: read-only memory (English: read-only memory, abbreviation: ROM), RAM, flash memory, hard disk, solid state hard disk, Magnetic tape (English: magnetic tape), floppy disk (English: floppy disk), optical disc (English: optical disc) and any combination thereof.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a data transmission processing method, a user equipment (UE), and a base station. The method comprises: receiving first instruction information sent by a base station, and storing context information of a UE according to the first instruction information, wherein the context information comprises identification information of the UE; decoding a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) according to the identification information of the UE to obtain second instruction information; determining, according to the second instruction information, that the UE is a paged object or there is a service for the UE. By adding instruction information aimed at a paged object in a PDCCH, a UE is able to determine whether the UE is a paged object or has a service according to whether the instruction information is able to be successfully obtained, and performs subsequent processing, for example, accessing a network, only when determining itself as the paged object or has a service, such that power consumption waste of a UE is avoided.

Description

数据传输处理方法、用户设备和基站Data transmission processing method, user equipment and base station 技术领域Technical field
本发明实施例涉及通信技术，尤其涉及一种数据传输处理方法、用户设备和基站。The embodiments of the present invention relate to communication technologies, and in particular, to a data transmission processing method, a user equipment, and a base station.
背景技术Background technique
目前，3GPP成立了新的窄带物联网(Narrow Band Internet Of Things，简称NB-IoT)项目，该项目的目标是进一步扩展当前的长期演进(Long Term Evolution，简称LTE)***，以支持大量的低吞吐量物联网设备或大量的对时延要求不敏感的物联网设备。对于这一类物联网设备而言，超低复杂度和超低功耗是两个关键的要求。Currently, 3GPP has established a new Narrow Band Internet Of Things (NB-IoT) project, the goal of which is to further expand the current Long Term Evolution (LTE) system to support a large number of low Throughput IoT devices or a large number of IoT devices that are not sensitive to latency requirements. For this type of IoT device, ultra-low complexity and ultra-low power are two key requirements.
将传统的LTE***中的终端设备，以及NB-IoT中的物联网设备，统称为用户设备(User Equipment，简称UE)，对于UE来说，在没有业务需要传输的情况下，UE通常处于空闲模式(idle mode)。当有业务需要进行数据传输时，UE需要从空闲模式进入连接模式。The terminal device in the traditional LTE system and the IoT device in the NB-IoT are collectively referred to as User Equipment (UE). For the UE, the UE is usually idle when there is no service to be transmitted. Mode (idle mode). When there is a service that needs data transmission, the UE needs to enter the connection mode from the idle mode.
当每次UE有数据需要传输而接入网络时，UE需要与网络侧设备间执行大量的消息交互流程才能执行下行数据或者上行数据的传输。其中，网络侧设备主要包括基站，比如演进基站(eUTRAN NodeB，简称eNB)以及移动性管理实体(Mobility Management Entity，简称MME)、服务网关(Serviing GateWay，简称SGW)等核心网设备。而大量的消息交互的主要目的还是为了在UE和eNB之间建立连接并建立有效的接入层上下文。因此，为了降低UE每次接入网络时进行大量的消息交互，目前3GPP组织同意在UE侧和eNB侧进行接入层上下文信息(以下简称为上下文信息)的保存，特别是UE特定的一些接入层参数的保存，从而可以减少无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，简称RRC)信令开销，从而有助于基于UE和eNB中保存的上下文信息快速接入网络，恢复数据传输。When the UE accesses the network, the UE needs to perform a large number of message interaction processes with the network side device to perform downlink data or uplink data transmission. The network side device mainly includes a base station, such as an eUTRAN NodeB (eNB), and a Mobility Management Entity (MME) and a Serving GateWay (SGW) core network device. The main purpose of a large number of message interactions is to establish a connection between the UE and the eNB and establish an effective access layer context. Therefore, in order to reduce a large number of message interactions each time the UE accesses the network, the current 3GPP organization agrees to save the access layer context information (hereinafter referred to as context information) on the UE side and the eNB side, in particular, some UE-specific connections. The inbound layer parameters are saved, so that the Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling overhead can be reduced, thereby facilitating rapid access to the network and recovering data transmission based on the context information stored in the UE and the eNB.
然而，目前在UE和eNB保存了UE的上下文信息的情况下，尤其对于UE有下行数据需要传输的情况，UE一般根据接收到的寻呼消息而触发恢复数据 传输的处理过程，因此，UE如何接收寻呼消息才能进一步降低UE的功耗是一个需要解决的问题。However, in the case that the UE and the eNB save the context information of the UE, especially for the case that the UE has downlink data to be transmitted, the UE generally triggers the recovery of the data according to the received paging message. The processing of the transmission, therefore, how the UE receives the paging message to further reduce the power consumption of the UE is a problem to be solved.
目前，UE一般通过如下的方式接收寻呼消息：首先需要计算接收寻呼消息的寻呼帧(Paging Frame，简称PF)和寻呼时机(Paging Occasion，简称PO)。具体地，一个寻呼时机可以是一个子帧。在一个寻呼帧内可以有多个寻呼子帧。PF和PO的确定是根据如下公式计算得到的：Currently, the UE generally receives the paging message by first calculating a paging frame (Paging Frame, PF for short) and a paging occasion (Paging Occasion, PO for short). Specifically, one paging occasion may be one subframe. There may be multiple paging subframes within a paging frame. The determination of PF and PO is calculated according to the following formula:
PF由如下公式推导获得，即获得满足下式的***帧号(System Frame Number，简称SFN)：The PF is derived by the following formula, that is, the system frame number (SFN) that satisfies the following formula is obtained:
SFN mod T＝(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N)；SFN mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N);
PO由如下公式首先推导获得i_s，然后基于得到的i_s，根据UE的制式从下表中查表得到对应的PO值：PO is first derived by the following formula to obtain i_s, and then based on the obtained i_s, according to the UE's system, the corresponding PO value is obtained from the table below:
i_s＝floor(UE_ID/N)mod NsI_s=floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns
其中，T为UE的DRX周期；Where T is the DRX cycle of the UE;
nB取自：4T,2T,T,T/2,T/4,T/8,T/16,T/32；nB is taken from: 4T, 2T, T, T/2, T/4, T/8, T/16, T/32;
N＝min(T，nB)；N=min(T, nB);
Ns＝max(1，nB/T)；Ns=max(1, nB/T);
UE_ID＝IMSI mod 1024。UE_ID = IMSI mod 1024.
其中，UE的制式一般包括频分双工(Frequency Division Duplexing，简称FDD)，时分双工(Time Division Duplexing，简称TDD)。The UE's standard generally includes Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD) and Time Division Duplexing (TDD).
FDD：FDD:
NsNs PO when i_s＝0PO when i_s=0 PO when i_s＝1PO when i_s=1 PO when i_s＝2PO when i_s=2 PO when i_s＝3PO when i_s=3
11 99 N/AN/A N/AN/A N/AN/A
22 44 99 N/AN/A N/AN/A
44 00 44 55 99
TDD(all UL/DL configurations)：TDD (all UL/DL configurations):
NsNs PO when i_s＝0PO when i_s=0 PO when i_s＝1PO when i_s=1 PO when i_s＝2PO when i_s=2 PO when i_s＝3PO when i_s=3
11 00 N/AN/A N/AN/A N/AN/A
22 00 55 N/AN/A N/AN/A
44 00 11 55 66
在确定了PF和PO之后，UE便在确定的PO时刻用寻呼无线网络临时标识符(Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier，简称P-RNTI)对物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel，简称PDCCH)进行译码，然后根据PDCCH所述指示的资源从物理下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Shared Channel，简称PDSCH)接收寻呼消息。当接收到的寻呼消息中包含有该UE 的标识信息时，UE就确定自己为被寻呼的UE，并根据网络的指示接入网络。After the PF and the PO are determined, the UE performs a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) on the Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) by using a Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier (P-RNTI) at the determined PO time. Decoding, and then receiving a paging message from a Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) according to the resource indicated by the PDCCH. The UE is included in the received paging message When identifying the information, the UE determines that it is the paged UE and accesses the network according to the indication of the network.
通过上述接收寻呼消息的方式可知：当UE在PO时刻译码PDCCH，并进一步从PDSCH接收寻呼消息后，寻呼消息中可能并没有UE的标识信息，也就是说在这种情况下，对该UE而言，这就是一次虚假寻呼(False Paging)。对于NB-IoT中的UE或者其他功耗比较敏感的UE而言，过多的虚假寻呼会导致检测寻呼消息时浪费较多的功耗，因此当前的寻呼机制对功耗敏感的UE来说，容易导致其功耗的浪费。According to the manner of receiving the paging message, when the UE decodes the PDCCH at the PO time and further receives the paging message from the PDSCH, the paging message may not have the identification information of the UE, that is, in this case, For the UE, this is a False Paging. For UEs in NB-IoT or other power-sensitive UEs, excessive false paging will result in wasted power consumption when detecting paging messages. Therefore, the current paging mechanism is for power-sensitive UEs. It is easy to cause a waste of power consumption.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种数据传输处理方法、用户设备和基站，通过避免UE尤其是功耗敏感型的UE接收虚假寻呼消息，来避免UE功耗的浪费。The embodiment of the present invention provides a data transmission processing method, a user equipment, and a base station, which avoids waste of power consumption of the UE by preventing the UE, especially the power-sensitive UE, from receiving a false paging message.
本发明第一方面提供一种数据传输处理方法，该方法的执行主体为用户设备，该方法包括：A first aspect of the present invention provides a data transmission processing method, where an execution subject of the method is a user equipment, and the method includes:
用户设备接收基站发送的第一指示信息，并根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息；The user equipment receives the first indication information sent by the base station, and saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the user equipment;
所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。Decoding, by the user equipment, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. business.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，包括：With reference to the first aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment, according to the identifier information of the user equipment, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH is obtained, and the second indication information is obtained, including:
若所述用户设备根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息；Determining, if the user equipment correctly decodes the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, To the second indication information;
或者，or,
所述用户设备根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息。Decoding, by the user equipment, the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：通过在PDCCH中携带有针对被寻呼对象 的指示信息即上述第二指示信息，使得用户设备能够基于能否成功获取该指示信息来确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务，在确定自身为被寻呼对象或有业务时，才进行接入网络等后续处理，避免了UE功耗的浪费。The above solution has the following technical effects: by carrying in the PDCCH for the paged object The indication information is the second indication information, so that the user equipment can determine whether it is a paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the indication information can be successfully obtained, and when it is determined that it is a paged object or has a service, Subsequent processing such as accessing the network avoids waste of power consumption of the UE.
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In conjunction with the first aspect or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, in a second possible implementation of the first aspect, the method further includes:
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；The user equipment receives the acquisition mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务，包括：With reference to the first aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment, according to the identifier information of the user equipment, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH is obtained, and the second indication information is obtained, where the second indication information is obtained. The service for determining that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment includes:
所述用户设备根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH以获取到所述第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息；The user equipment detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message;
所述用户设备根据所述调度信息从PDSCH上接收到所述用户设备对应的寻呼消息，根据所述寻呼消息确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务。The user equipment receives a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH according to the scheduling information, and determines, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：通过提供多种可选的获取PDCCH中携带的针对被寻呼对象的指示信息的获取方式，提高了该指示信息获取的灵活性。The foregoing solution has the following technical effects: the flexibility of obtaining the indication information is improved by providing a plurality of optional acquisition manners for obtaining indication information for the paged object carried in the PDCCH.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第三种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的 标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，包括：With reference to the first aspect, any one of the first to the third aspect of the first aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment according to the user equipment The identifier information is used to decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, and the second indication information is obtained, including:
所述用户设备搜索公共搜索空间CSS或者用户设备特定的搜索空间USS，采用所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH的DCI格式，获取所述第二指示信息。The user equipment searches for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, and uses the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquires the second indication information.
结合第一方面的第一种至第四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。With reference to any one of the first to fourth possible implementations of the first aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or Or emergency service instructions.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：在DCI格式中除了携带上述第二指示信息外，还可以携带用于指示***信息改变、紧急服务等的信息，扩展了DCI格式的作用，使得UE能够及时、准确获知相应的指示信息。The foregoing solution has the following technical effects: in addition to carrying the second indication information, the DCI format may carry information for indicating system information change, emergency service, etc., and expands the role of the DCI format, so that the UE can know in time and accurately. Corresponding instructions.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第五种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：With reference to the first aspect, any one of the first to the fifth aspect of the first aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
所述用户设备在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，向所述基站发送上下文信息保存请求。The user equipment sends a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
结合第一方面的第六种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第七种可能的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息是所述基站根据所述上下文信息保存请求发送的。In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the first aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information save request.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：在确定UE一定时间没有进行数据传输之后，基站才向UE发送用于指示其保存上下文信息的指示信息，使得上下文信息的保存时机与UE的实际数据传输情况相匹配，保证了上下文信息保存操作时机的准确、可靠。The foregoing solution has the following technical effects: after determining that the UE does not perform data transmission for a certain period of time, the base station sends indication information indicating that the context information is saved to the UE, so that the storage timing of the context information matches the actual data transmission situation of the UE. It ensures the accuracy and reliability of the context information saving operation.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第七种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备接收基站发送的第一指示信息，并根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，包括：With reference to the first aspect, the any one of the first to the seventh aspect of the first aspect, in the eighth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment receives the first sent by the base station Instructing information, and saving context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, including:
所述用户设备根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥；And the user equipment saves, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security key includes encryption and/or integrity Sexual protection key;
所述用户设备确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务之后，所述方法还包括：After the user equipment determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has a service of the user equipment, the method further includes:
所述用户设备确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用所述安全密钥和所述 需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。Determining, by the user equipment, a radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and using the security key and the The data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
结合第一方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第九种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备使用安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述无线承载的数据传输，包括：With reference to the eighth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a ninth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment performs a target by using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored The data transmission of the radio bearer includes:
所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密后发送给所述基站。And determining, by the user equipment, that the uplink data needs to be sent, using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored to generate an encryption key stream, and encrypting the uplink data by using the encryption key stream. Then sent to the base station.
结合第一方面的第九种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In conjunction with the ninth possible implementation of the first aspect, in a tenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，根据所述基站预先分配的基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。The user equipment sends the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource that is allocated in advance by the user equipment when it is determined that the uplink data needs to be sent.
结合第一方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备使用安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述无线承载的数据传输，包括：With reference to the eighth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the eleventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment performs, by using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored, The data transmission of the radio bearer includes:
所述用户设备在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。When determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment decrypts the received downlink data by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
结合第一方面的第八种至第十一种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十二种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In a twelfth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的需要恢复的无线承载标识；Receiving, by the user equipment, a radio bearer identifier that is sent by the base station and needs to be restored;
所述用户设备根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。Determining, by the user equipment, the radio bearer that needs to be restored according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：UE根据第一指示信息保存安全密钥和多个无线承载的数据包计数器，使得在UE根据第二指示信息确定自身有业务数据需要传输时，能够基于该保存信息进行上行数据、下行数据的安全可靠传输。The foregoing solution has the following technical effects: the UE saves the security key and the data packet counter of the plurality of radio bearers according to the first indication information, so that when the UE determines that the service data needs to be transmitted according to the second indication information, the UE can perform the saving information according to the saved information. Secure and reliable transmission of uplink data and downlink data.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第十二种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十三种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，包括： With reference to the first aspect, any one of the first to the twelfth possible embodiments of the first aspect, in the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment according to the user The identifier information of the device is used to decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, and the second indication information is obtained, including:
所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息；Decoding, by the user equipment, the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment;
或者，or,
所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息。The user equipment decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquires N second indication information that the base station continuously sends on a PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO .
上述方案具有如下技术效果：通过多次发送用于指示UE是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务的第二指示信息的方式，保证了基站的寻呼可靠性，即UE能够更加准确地确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或有业务，以使得后续数据传输的触发更加准确、可靠。The above solution has the following technical effects: the paging reliability of the base station is ensured by transmitting the second indication information for indicating whether the UE is the paged object or whether there is a service, that is, the UE can determine itself more accurately. Whether it is a paged object or a service, so that the triggering of subsequent data transmission is more accurate and reliable.
结合第一方面的第十三种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十四种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：With reference to the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数；The user equipment receives downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the base station, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and downlink data is received, where m is greater than or An integer equal to 0;
所述用户设备确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务之后，所述方法还包括：After the user equipment determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has a service of the user equipment, the method further includes:
所述用户设备根据所述下行数据接收时机配置信息，接收所述下行数据。The user equipment receives the downlink data according to the downlink data receiving opportunity configuration information.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：基于多次发送第二指示信息的方式，UE针对下行数据的接收，可以根据基站分配的下行数据接收时机配置信息直接进行下行数据的可靠结果。The foregoing solution has the following technical effects: based on the method of transmitting the second indication information multiple times, the UE can directly perform the reliable result of the downlink data according to the downlink data receiving timing configuration information allocated by the base station for receiving the downlink data.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第十四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十五种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息之后，还包括：With reference to the first aspect, any one of the first to the fourteenth possible aspects of the first aspect, in the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the user equipment according to the user After the identifier information of the device is decoded, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH is obtained, and after the second indication information is obtained, the method further includes:
所述用户设备利用获得的上行反馈资源，向所述基站发送获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。The user equipment sends the acquisition feedback information to the base station by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, where the acquisition feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully obtains the second indication information.
结合第一方面的第十五种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十六种可能 的实施方式中，所述上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者所述基站根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。In conjunction with the fifteenth possible implementation of the first aspect, the sixteenth possibility in the first aspect In an embodiment, the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the base station according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：基于反馈机制，即UE在获取到第二指示信息后及时反馈基站，使得基站为UE分配的资源更加可靠，避免浪费。The foregoing solution has the following technical effects: based on the feedback mechanism, the UE feeds back the base station in time after obtaining the second indication information, so that the resources allocated by the base station for the UE are more reliable and avoid waste.
结合第一方面、第一方面的第一种至第十六种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十七种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务之后，还包括：With reference to the first aspect, any one of the first to the sixteenth aspects of the first aspect, in the seventeenth possible implementation of the first aspect, the user equipment determines the user After the device is a paged object or has the service of the user equipment, the device further includes:
所述用户设备向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。The user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
结合第一方面的第十七种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十八种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息之前，还包括：In conjunction with the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the eighteenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, before the user equipment sends the RRC connection request message to the base station, the method further includes:
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；The user equipment receives the resource configuration information sent by the base station, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
所述用户设备向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息，包括：The user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, including:
所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送所述RRC连接请求。The user equipment sends the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第一方面的第十七种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第十九种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息之前，还包括：In conjunction with the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a nineteenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, before the user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, the method further includes:
所述用户设备通过SR资源向所述基站发送资源请求；The user equipment sends a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource;
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息；Receiving, by the user equipment, resource configuration information sent by the base station;
所述用户设备向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息，包括：The user equipment sends an RRC connection request message to the base station, including:
所述用户设备根据所述资源配置信息向所述基站发送所述RRC连接请求消息；Sending, by the user equipment, the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information;
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
上述方案具有如下技术效果：在UE有上行数据或下行数据需要传输时，通过发送RRC连接请求消息，以恢复数据传输，UE为了获得用于发 送RRC连接请求消息的资源，既可以主动请求基站分配资源，以通过基站分配的资源发送RRC连接请求消息；也可以基于基站预先分配的CB-PUSCH资源，竞争方式发送RRC连接请求消息。不论哪种方式，都避免了为UE分配的资源的浪费。The foregoing solution has the following technical effects: when the UE has uplink data or downlink data needs to be transmitted, the RRC connection request message is sent to recover the data transmission, and the UE obtains the data for transmission. The resource that sends the RRC connection request message may request the base station to allocate resources to send the RRC connection request message through the resources allocated by the base station. The RRC connection request message may also be sent in a contentive manner based on the CB-PUSCH resources allocated by the base station. Either way, the waste of resources allocated to the UE is avoided.
本发明第二方面提供一种数据传输处理方法，该方法的执行主体为基站，该方法包括：A second aspect of the present invention provides a data transmission processing method, where the method is performed by a base station, and the method includes:
基站向用户设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括的所述用户设备的标识信息；The base station sends the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the user equipment included in the context information Identification information;
所述基站通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户设备在根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The base station sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines that the user equipment is when the second indicator information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment. The object being paged or having the service of the user equipment.
结合第二方面，在第二方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二指示信息包括：所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，或者，所述第二指示信息携带于DCI格式中；With reference to the second aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the second indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format in;
所述用户设备的标识信息，用于在覆盖所述用户设备的基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备。The identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In conjunction with the second aspect or the first possible implementation of the second aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站向所述用户设备发送获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；The base station sends the acquisition mode indication information to the user equipment, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信 息。a third acquiring manner: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication interest.
结合第二方面的第一种或第二种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。With reference to the first or second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information. .
结合第二方面、第二方面的第一种至第三种中任一种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述基站向所述用户设备发送第一指示信息，包括：With reference to the second aspect, the first to the third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the base station sends the first to the user equipment Instructions, including:
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的上下文信息保存请求，所述上下文信息保存请求是所述用户设备在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时发送的；Receiving, by the base station, a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the context information saving request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time;
所述基站根据所述上下文信息保存请求确定所述用户设备在预设时间内没有进行数据传输，保存所述上下文信息，并向所述用户设备发送所述第一指示信息；Determining, by the base station, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time according to the context information saving request, saving the context information, and sending the first indication information to the user equipment;
或者，or,
所述基站在确定用户设备在预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，保存所述上下文信息，并向所述用户设备发送所述第一指示信息。When the base station determines that the user equipment does not need to transmit data within a preset time, the base station saves the context information, and sends the first indication information to the user equipment.
结合第二方面、第二方面的第一种至第四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，并在确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务之后，确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。With reference to the second aspect, the any one of the first to the fourth aspect of the second aspect, in the fifth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the first indication information is used to indicate The user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. After the service, determining the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and performing data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered, the security key including encryption and / or integrity protection key.
结合第二方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In conjunction with the fifth possible implementation of the second aspect, in a sixth possible implementation of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的上行数据，所述上行数据是所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密后发送的。Receiving, by the base station, the uplink data sent by the user equipment, where the uplink data is generated by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that the uplink data needs to be sent. Encrypting a key stream, using the encrypted key stream to encrypt and transmit the uplink data.
结合第二方面的第六种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第七种可能的实 施方式中，所述方法还包括：In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the second aspect, the seventh possible implementation in the second aspect In the method, the method further includes:
所述基站向所述用户设备发送基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源，所述CB-PUSCH资源用于指示所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。The base station sends a contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource to the user equipment, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to indicate that the user equipment sends the uplink data according to the CB-PUSCH resource in a contentive manner. .
结合第二方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：With reference to the fifth possible implementation of the second aspect, in an eighth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站向所述用户设备发送下行数据，以使所述用户设备在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的所述下行数据。The base station sends downlink data to the user equipment, so that when determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received station. Describe the downlink data.
结合第二方面的第五种至第八种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第九种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In a ninth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站向所述用户设备发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，所述需要恢复的无线承载标识用于指示用户设备根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。And the base station sends the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored to the user equipment, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to indicate that the user equipment determines the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
结合第二方面、第二方面的第一种至第九种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，所述基站通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，包括：With reference to the second aspect, the possible implementation manner of any one of the first to the ninth aspect, in the tenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the base station sends the second indication information by using a PDCCH, include:
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送所述第二指示信息；Transmitting, by the PDCCH, the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment, respectively;
或者，or,
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息。And transmitting, by the PDCCH, N pieces of second indication information continuously on one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO.
结合第二方面的第十种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述基站通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息之前，还包括：With reference to the tenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in the eleventh possible implementation manner of the second aspect, before the sending, by the eNB, the second indication information by using the PDCCH, the method further includes:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数。Sending downlink data reception timing configuration information to the user equipment, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 .
结合第二方面、第二方面的第一种至第十一种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第十二种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In a twelfth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站接收所述用户设备利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息， 所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。Receiving, by the base station, the acquisition feedback information sent by the user equipment by using an uplink feedback resource, where The obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully acquires the second indication information.
结合第二方面的第十二种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第十三种可能的实施方式中，所述基站接收所述用户设备利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息之前，还包括：With reference to the twelfth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a thirteenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, before the receiving, by the base station, the acquiring feedback information that is sent by the user equipment by using an uplink feedback resource, :
所述基站向所述用户设备发送上行反馈资源配置信息，所述上行反馈资源配置信息所指示的上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。The base station sends the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
结合第二方面、第二方面的第一种至第十三种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第十四种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：With reference to the second aspect, the first to the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。The base station receives an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
结合第二方面的第十四种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第十五种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：With reference to the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a fifteenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；The base station sends resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，包括：Receiving, by the base station, an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where
所述基站接收所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送的RRC连接请求消息。The base station receives an RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第二方面的第十五种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第十六种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：In conjunction with the fifteenth possible implementation of the second aspect, in a sixteenth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
所述基站接收所述用户设备通过SR资源发送的资源请求；Receiving, by the base station, a resource request sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
所述基站向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息；Sending, by the base station, resource configuration information to the user equipment;
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，包括：Receiving, by the base station, an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where
所述基站接收所述用户设备根据所述资源配置信息发送的所述RRC连接请求消息；Receiving, by the base station, the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。 The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本发明第三方面提供一种用户设备，包括：A third aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
接收模块，用于接收基站发送的第一指示信息；a receiving module, configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station;
保存模块，用于根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息；a saving module, configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment;
获取模块，用于根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息；An acquiring module, configured to decode a physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, to obtain second indication information;
确定模块，用于在所述获取模块获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。And a determining module, configured to determine, when the acquiring module acquires the second indication information, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
结合第三方面，在第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述获取模块包括：In conjunction with the third aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the acquiring module includes:
第一获取子模块，用于若根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息；a first obtaining submodule, configured to correctly decode downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station Determining that the second indication information is obtained;
或者，所述获取模块包括：Alternatively, the obtaining module includes:
第二获取子模块，用于根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息。a second acquiring sub-module, configured to decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station, and acquire the DCI in the PDCCH The second indication information included in the format.
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于：In conjunction with the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the receiving module is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Receiving the acquisition mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
结合第三方面，在第三方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述获取模块 包括：In conjunction with the third aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the acquiring module include:
第三获取子模块，用于根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH以获取到所述第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息；a third acquiring submodule, configured to detect the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message;
第四获取子模块，用于根据所述调度信息从PDSCH上接收到所述用户设备对应的寻呼消息；a fourth obtaining submodule, configured to receive, according to the scheduling information, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH;
所述确定模块，还用于根据所述寻呼消息确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务。The determining module is further configured to determine, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
结合第三方面的第一种至第三种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述获取模块具体用于：With reference to any one of the first to the third possible embodiments of the third aspect, in the fourth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the acquiring module is specifically configured to:
搜索公共搜索空间CSS或者用户设备特定的搜索空间USS，采用所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH的DCI格式，获取所述第二指示信息。Searching for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, using the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquiring the second indication information.
结合第三方面的第一种至第四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。In a fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or Or emergency service instructions.
结合第三方面、第三方面的第一种至第五种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备还包括：With reference to the third aspect, the any one of the first to the fifth aspect of the third aspect, in the sixth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the user equipment further includes:
发送模块，用于在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，向所述基站发送上下文信息保存请求。And a sending module, configured to send a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
结合第三方面的第六种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第七种可能的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息是所述基站根据所述上下文信息保存请求发送的。With reference to the sixth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information save request.
结合第三方面、第三方面的第一种至第七种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述保存模块还用于：In conjunction with the third aspect, the any one of the first to the seventh aspect of the third aspect, in the eighth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the saving module is further configured to:
根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥；And storing, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security key includes an encryption and/or integrity protection key ;
所述确定模块还用于：确定需要恢复的无线承载；The determining module is further configured to: determine a radio bearer that needs to be restored;
所述用户设备还包括：The user equipment further includes:
处理模块，用于使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。 And a processing module, configured to perform, by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
结合第三方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第九种可能的实施方式中，所述处理模块用于：In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the third aspect, in a ninth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing module is configured to:
在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密；And determining, when the uplink data needs to be sent, using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored to generate an encryption key stream, and encrypting the uplink data by using the encryption key stream;
所述发送模块还用于，将加密后的所述上行数据发送给所述基站。The sending module is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
结合第三方面的第九种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块，还用于：在确定有上行数据需要发送时，根据所述基站预先分配的基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。With reference to the ninth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a tenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending module is further configured to: pre-determine according to the base station when determining that uplink data needs to be sent The allocated contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resources transmit the uplink data in a contentive manner.
结合第三方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理模块还用于：In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the third aspect, in an eleventh possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing module is further configured to:
在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。When it is determined that there is downlink data to be received, the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
结合第三方面的第八种至第十一种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十二种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于：接收所述基站发送的需要恢复的无线承载标识；In a twelfth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the receiving module is further configured to: receive the base station The radio bearer identifier to be recovered that needs to be recovered;
所述确定模块还用于：根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。The determining module is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be restored.
结合第三方面、第三方面的第一种至第十二种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十三种可能的实施方式中，所述获取模块还用于：In conjunction with the third aspect, the first to the twelfth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the acquiring module is further configured to:
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息；Decoding a PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment;
或者，or,
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息。The PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
结合第三方面的第十三种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十四种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于： In conjunction with the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the receiving module is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数；Receiving downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the base station, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 ;
根据所述下行数据接收时机配置信息，接收所述下行数据。Receiving the downlink data according to the downlink data reception timing configuration information.
结合第三方面、第三方面的第一种至第十四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十五种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：With reference to the third aspect, the any one of the first to the fourteenth aspects of the third aspect, in the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
利用获得的上行反馈资源，向所述基站发送获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。And obtaining, by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, the acquiring feedback information, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully acquires the second indication information.
结合第三方面的第十五种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十六种可能的实施方式中，所述上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者所述基站根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。With reference to the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in the sixteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or the base station corresponds to the user equipment The PO determines the uplink subframe.
结合第三方面、第三方面的第一种至第十六种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十七种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块，还用于：In conjunction with the third aspect, the any one of the first to the sixteenth aspects of the third aspect, in the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending module is further used :
向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。And transmitting, by the base station, an RRC connection request message, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
结合第三方面的第十七种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十八种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于：In conjunction with the seventeenth possible implementation of the third aspect, in the eighteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the receiving module is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；Receiving, by the base station, resource configuration information, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
所述发送模块还用于：The sending module is further configured to:
根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送所述RRC连接请求。And transmitting the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第三方面的第十七种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十九种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：通过SR资源向所述基站发送资源请求；With the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a nineteenth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending module is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource;
所述接收模块还用于：接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息；The receiving module is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station;
所述发送模块还用于：The sending module is further configured to:
根据所述资源配置信息向所述基站发送所述RRC连接请求消息；And sending the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information;
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信 息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes an acquisition feedback message for successfully acquiring the second indication information. Information and/or indications that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本发明实施例第四方面提供了一种基站，包括：A fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a base station, including:
发送模块，用于向用户设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括的所述用户设备的标识信息；a sending module, configured to send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes Identification information of the user equipment;
所述发送模块，还用于通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户设备在根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The sending module is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines, when the second indication information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, The user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
结合第四方面，在第四方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，或者，所述第二指示信息携带于DCI格式中；With reference to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
所述用户设备的标识信息，用于在覆盖所述用户设备的基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备。The identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Sending the acquisition mode indication information to the user equipment, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
结合第四方面的第一种或第二种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。With reference to the first or second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information. .
结合第四方面、第四方面的第一种至第三种中任一种可能的实施方式， 在第四方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，还包括：In combination with the fourth aspect, any one of the first to third aspects of the fourth aspect, In a fourth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes:
接收模块，用于接收所述用户设备发送的上下文信息保存请求，所述上下文信息保存请求是所述用户设备在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时发送的；a receiving module, configured to receive a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the context information saving request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time period;
确定模块，具体用于根据所述上下文信息保存请求确定所述用户设备在预设时间内没有进行数据传输；a determining module, configured to determine, according to the context information saving request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time;
保存模块，用于保存所述上下文信息。A save module for saving the context information.
结合第四方面、第四方面的第一种至第四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，并在确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务之后，确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。With reference to the fourth aspect, the any one of the first to the fourth aspect of the fourth aspect, in the fifth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the first indication information is used to indicate The user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. After the service, determining the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and performing data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered, the security key including encryption and / or integrity protection key.
结合第四方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于：In conjunction with the fifth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving module is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的上行数据，所述上行数据是所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密后发送的。Receiving uplink data sent by the user equipment, where the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
结合第四方面的第六种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第七种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源，所述CB-PUSCH资源用于指示所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。Sending, by the user equipment, a contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to indicate that the user equipment sends the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第四方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：In conjunction with the fifth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in the eighth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据，以使所述用户设备在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的所述下行数据。 Sending downlink data to the user equipment, so that when determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received downlink data. .
结合第四方面的第五种至第八种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第九种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：In a ninth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，所述需要恢复的无线承载标识用于指示所述用户设备根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。Sending, to the user equipment, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
结合第四方面、第四方面的第一种至第九种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：With reference to the fourth aspect, the any one of the first to the ninth aspect of the fourth aspect, in the tenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送所述第二指示信息；Transmitting, by the PDCCH, the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment, respectively;
或者，or,
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息。And transmitting, by the PDCCH, N pieces of second indication information continuously on one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO.
结合第四方面的第十种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：In conjunction with the tenth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in the eleventh possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数。Sending downlink data reception timing configuration information to the user equipment, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 .
结合第四方面、第四方面的第一种至第十一种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第十二种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于：In a twelfth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving module is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。Receiving the acquisition feedback information sent by the user equipment by using the uplink feedback resource, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully obtains the second indication information.
结合第四方面的第十二种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第十三种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：In conjunction with the twelfth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送上行反馈资源配置信息，所述上行反馈资源配置信息所指示的上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。Sending the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
结合第四方面、第四方面的第一种至第十三种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第十四种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于：With reference to the fourth aspect, the first to the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving module is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC 连接重建立请求消息。Receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC The connection re-establishment request message.
结合第四方面的第十四种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第十五种可能的实施方式中，所述发送模块还用于：In conjunction with the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending module is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；Transmitting the resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
所述接收模块还用于：The receiving module is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送的RRC连接请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第四方面的第十五种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第十六种可能的实施方式中，所述接收模块还用于：接收所述用户设备通过SR资源发送的资源请求；With the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a sixteenth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving module is further configured to: receive a resource request that is sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
所述发送模块还用于：向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息；The sending module is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment;
所述接收模块还用于：接收所述用户设备根据所述资源配置信息发送的所述RRC连接请求消息；The receiving module is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本发明第五方面提供了一种用户设备，包括：A fifth aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
接收器，用于接收基站发送的第一指示信息；a receiver, configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station;
处理器，用于根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息；a processor, configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment;
所述处理器，还用于根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息；The processor is further configured to: decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquire second indication information;
所述处理器，还用于在所述获取模块获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The processor is further configured to: when the acquiring module acquires the second indication information, determine that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器还用于：In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
若根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格 式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息；Decoding the downlink control information DCI in the PDCCH correctly according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station And determining to obtain the second indication information;
或者，所述处理器还用于：Alternatively, the processor is further configured to:
根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息。Decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the second part included in the DCI format in the PDCCH Instructions.
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：In conjunction with the fifth aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the receiver is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Receiving the acquisition mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器还用于：In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH以获取到所述第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息；Detecting a PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of a paging message;
根据所述调度信息从PDSCH上接收到所述用户设备对应的寻呼消息；Receiving, according to the scheduling information, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH;
根据所述寻呼消息确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务。Determining, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or has a service of the user equipment.
结合第五方面的第一种至第三种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器还用于：In a fourth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
搜索公共搜索空间CSS或者用户设备特定的搜索空间USS，采用所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH的DCI格式，获取所述第二指示信息。Searching for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, using the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquiring the second indication information.
结合第五方面的第一种至第四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第一方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信 息和/或紧急服务指示信息。With reference to any one of the first to fourth possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect, in the fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the DCI format further includes a system information change indication Information and/or emergency service instructions.
结合第五方面、第五方面的第一种至第五种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，所述用户设备还包括：With reference to the fifth aspect, the any one of the first to the fifth aspect of the fifth aspect, in the sixth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the user equipment further includes:
发送器，用于在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，向所述基站发送上下文信息保存请求。And a transmitter, configured to send a context information save request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
结合第五方面的第六种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第七种可能的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息是所述基站根据所述上下文信息保存请求发送的。With reference to the sixth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information saving request.
结合第五方面、第五方面的第一种至第七种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器还用于：With reference to the fifth aspect, the any one of the first to the seventh aspect of the fifth aspect, in the eighth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥；And storing, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security key includes an encryption and/or integrity protection key ;
所述处理器还用于：确定需要恢复的无线承载；The processor is further configured to: determine a radio bearer that needs to be restored;
所述处理器还用于使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。The processor is further configured to perform data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered by using the security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
结合第五方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第九种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器还用于：In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the fifth aspect, in a ninth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密；And determining, when the uplink data needs to be sent, using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored to generate an encryption key stream, and encrypting the uplink data by using the encryption key stream;
所述发送器还用于，将加密后的所述上行数据发送给所述基站。The transmitter is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
结合第五方面的第九种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器，还用于：在确定有上行数据需要发送时，根据所述基站预先分配的基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。With reference to the ninth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a tenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to: pre-determine according to the base station when determining that uplink data needs to be sent The allocated contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resources transmit the uplink data in a contentive manner.
结合第五方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器还用于：In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the fifth aspect, in an eleventh possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。 When it is determined that there is downlink data to be received, the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
结合第五方面的第八种至第十一种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十二种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：接收所述基站发送的需要恢复的无线承载标识；In a twelfth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the receiver is further configured to: receive the base station The radio bearer identifier to be recovered that needs to be recovered;
所述处理器还用于：根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。The processor is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be restored.
结合第五方面、第五方面的第一种至第十二种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十三种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器还用于：With reference to the fifth aspect, the any one of the first to the twelfth aspects of the fifth aspect, in the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息；Decoding a PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment;
或者，or,
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息。The PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
结合第五方面的第十三种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十四种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：With reference to the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a fourteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the receiver is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数；Receiving downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the base station, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 ;
根据所述下行数据接收时机配置信息，接收所述下行数据。Receiving the downlink data according to the downlink data reception timing configuration information.
结合第五方面、第五方面的第一种至第十四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十五种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：With reference to the fifth aspect, any one of the first to the fourteenth aspects of the fifth aspect, in the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
利用获得的上行反馈资源，向所述基站发送获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。And obtaining, by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, the acquiring feedback information, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully acquires the second indication information.
结合第五方面的第十五种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十六种可能的实施方式中，所述上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者所述基站根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。With the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a sixteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or the base station is configured according to the user equipment The PO determines the uplink subframe.
结合第五方面、第五方面的第一种至第十六种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十七种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器，还用于：With reference to the fifth aspect, any one of the first to the sixteenth aspects of the fifth aspect, in the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the transmitter is further used :
向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括 RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。Sending an RRC connection request message to the base station, where the RRC connection request message includes The RRC Connection Recovery Request message, or the RRC Connection Setup Request message, or the RRC Connection Reestablishment Request message.
结合第五方面的第十七种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十八种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：In conjunction with the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in the eighteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the receiver is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；Receiving, by the base station, resource configuration information, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
所述发送器还用于：The transmitter is also used to:
根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送所述RRC连接请求。And transmitting the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第五方面的第十七种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第十九种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：通过SR资源向所述基站发送资源请求；With the seventeenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a nineteenth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource;
所述接收器还用于：接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息；The receiver is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station;
所述发送器还用于：The transmitter is also used to:
根据所述资源配置信息向所述基站发送所述RRC连接请求消息；And sending the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information;
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本发明第六方面提供了一种基站，包括：A sixth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
发送器，用于向用户设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括的所述用户设备的标识信息；a transmitter, configured to send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information is included Identification information of the user equipment;
所述发送器，还用于通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户设备在根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The transmitter is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines, when the second indication information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, The user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
结合第六方面，在第六方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述指示信息包括：所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，或者，所述第二指示信息携带于DCI格式中；With reference to the sixth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
所述用户设备的标识信息，用于在覆盖所述用户设备的基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备。 The identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In conjunction with the sixth aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Sending the acquisition mode indication information to the user equipment, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
结合第六方面的第一种或第二种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。With reference to the first or second possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information. .
结合第六方面、第六方面的第一种至第三种中任一种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，还包括：With reference to the sixth aspect, the first to the third possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the method further includes:
接收器，用于接收所述用户设备发送的上下文信息保存请求，所述上下文信息保存请求是所述用户设备在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时发送的；a receiver, configured to receive a context information save request sent by the user equipment, where the context information save request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time;
处理器，用于根据所述上下文信息保存请求确定所述用户设备在预设时间内没有进行数据传输；保存所述上下文信息；a processor, configured to determine, according to the context information save request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time; save the context information;
或者，所述处理器还用于：Alternatively, the processor is further configured to:
在确定用户设备在预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，保存所述上下文信息，并向所述用户设备发送所述上下文保存指示信息。When it is determined that the user equipment does not need to transmit data within a preset time, the context information is saved, and the context saving indication information is sent to the user equipment.
结合第六方面、第六方面的第一种至第四种中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，并在确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务之后，确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用所述安 全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。With reference to the sixth aspect, the any one of the first to the fourth aspect of the sixth aspect, in the fifth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the first indication information is used to indicate The user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determines that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. After the service, determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and use the security The full key and the data counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered perform data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, the security key containing an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
结合第六方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：With reference to the fifth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the receiver is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的上行数据，所述上行数据是所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密后发送的。Receiving uplink data sent by the user equipment, where the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
结合第六方面的第六种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第七种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the sixth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源，所述CB-PUSCH资源用于指示所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。Sending, by the user equipment, a contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to indicate that the user equipment sends the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第六方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In conjunction with the fifth possible implementation of the sixth aspect, in an eighth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据，以使所述用户设备在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的所述下行数据。Sending downlink data to the user equipment, so that when determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received downlink data. .
结合第六方面的第五种至第八种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第九种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In a ninth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，所述需要恢复的无线承载标识用于指示所述用户设备根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。Sending, to the user equipment, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
结合第六方面、第六方面的第一种至第九种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In conjunction with the sixth aspect, the possible implementation of any one of the first to the ninth aspects, in the tenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送所述第二指示信息；Transmitting, by the PDCCH, the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment, respectively;
或者，or,
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息。 And transmitting, by the PDCCH, N pieces of second indication information continuously on one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO.
结合第六方面的第十种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In conjunction with the tenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in the eleventh possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数。Sending downlink data reception timing configuration information to the user equipment, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 .
结合第六方面、第六方面的第一种至第十一种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第十二种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：In a twelfth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the receiver is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。Receiving the acquisition feedback information sent by the user equipment by using the uplink feedback resource, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully obtains the second indication information.
结合第六方面的第十二种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第十三种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In conjunction with the twelfth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a thirteenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送上行反馈资源配置信息，所述上行反馈资源配置信息所指示的上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。Sending the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
结合第六方面、第六方面的第一种至第十三种中任一项可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第十四种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：With reference to the sixth aspect, the first to the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the receiver is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
结合第六方面的第十四种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第十五种可能的实施方式中，所述发送器还用于：In conjunction with the fourteenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fifteenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the transmitter is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；Transmitting the resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
所述接收器还用于：The receiver is also used to:
接收所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送的RRC连接请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
结合第六方面的第十五种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第十六种可能的实施方式中，所述接收器还用于：接收所述用户设备通过SR资源发送的资源请求； With the fifteenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a sixteenth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the receiver is further configured to: receive a resource request that is sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
所述发送器还用于：向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息；The transmitter is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment;
所述接收器还用于：接收所述用户设备根据所述资源配置信息发送的所述RRC连接请求消息；The receiver is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本发明提供的数据传输处理方法、用户设备和基站，用户设备在接收到基站发送的第一指示信息后，根据第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，其中，该上下文信息中包括用户设备的标识信息。进而，用户设备根据该标识信息解码PDCCH，如果能够解码出指示该用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有用户设备的业务的第二指示信息，则说明该用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有业务需要进行传输。通过在PDCCH中携带有针对被寻呼对象的指示信息，使得用户设备能够基于能否成功获取该指示信息来确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务，在确定自身为被寻呼对象或有业务时，才进行接入网络等后续处理，避免了UE功耗的浪费。The data transmission processing method, the user equipment, and the base station are provided by the user equipment, after receiving the first indication information sent by the base station, the user equipment saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the user equipment. Identification information. Further, the user equipment decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information, and if the second indication information indicating that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment can be decoded, the user equipment is a paged object or has a service requirement. Transfer. By carrying the indication information for the paged object in the PDCCH, the user equipment can determine whether it is the paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the indication information can be successfully obtained, and determine that it is the paged object or When there is a service, subsequent processing such as accessing the network is performed, thereby avoiding waste of power consumption of the UE.
附图说明DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例或现有技术中的技术方案，下面将对实施例或现有技术描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍，显而易见地，下面描述中的附图是本发明的一些实施例，对于本领域普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions in the prior art, a brief description of the drawings used in the embodiments or the prior art description will be briefly described below. Obviously, the drawings in the following description It is a certain embodiment of the present invention, and other drawings can be obtained from those skilled in the art without any inventive labor.
图1为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例一的流程图；FIG. 1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图2为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例二的流程图；2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图3为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例三的流程图；FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例四的流程图；4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图5为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例五的流程图；FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例六的流程图；FIG. 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例七的流程图；FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例八的流程图；FIG. 8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图9为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例九的流程图；FIG. 9 is a flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图10为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例十的交互图； FIG. 10 is an interaction diagram of Embodiment 10 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图11为本发明实施例提供的用户设备实施例一的结构示意图；FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图12为本发明实施例提供的用户设备实施例二的结构示意图；FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图13为本发明实施例提供的用户设备实施例三的结构示意图；FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14为本发明实施例提供的基站实施例一的结构示意图；FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图15为本发明实施例提供的基站实施例二的结构示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式detailed description
为使本发明实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图，对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述，显然，所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本发明中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本发明保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention will be clearly and completely described in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is a partial embodiment of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by those skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
图1为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例一的流程图，如图1所示，该方案的执行主体为用户设备(UE)，该数据传输处理方法包括如下步骤：FIG. 1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1 , an execution entity of the solution is a user equipment (UE), and the data transmission processing method includes the following steps:
步骤101、UE接收eNB发送的第一指示信息，并根据第一指示信息保存UE的上下文信息，上下文信息中包括所述UE的标识信息。Step 101: The UE receives the first indication information sent by the eNB, and saves the context information of the UE according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the UE.
其中，eNB是在确定UE在预设时间内没有进行数据传输时，向UE发送第一指示信息的。The eNB sends the first indication information to the UE when determining that the UE does not perform data transmission within a preset time.
具体来说，eNB可以通过如下可选的方式确定UE在预设时间内是否有进行数据传输：Specifically, the eNB may determine whether the UE performs data transmission within a preset time by using an optional manner as follows:
第一种方式：UE在与网络进行数据传输的过程中，如果在完成当前的某个数据传输之后，一定时间内，没有后续需要传输的数据，即确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，向eNB发送上下文信息保存请求，以使eNB保存UE的上下文信息即以请求eNB保存UE的上下文信息。此时，第一指示信息是eNB根据该上下文信息保存请求发送的，也就是说，当eNB接收到该上下文信息保存请求时，确定UE在该时间内没有需要继续传输的数据，可以向UE发送上述上下文保存指示消息，在该上下文保存指示消息中携带有上述第一指示信息。The first mode: in the process of data transmission with the network, if after completing a current data transmission, there is no data to be transmitted later, that is, data that does not need to be transmitted within a preset time. The eNB sends a context information save request to the eNB to save the context information of the UE, that is, request the eNB to save the context information of the UE. At this time, the first indication information is sent by the eNB according to the context information saving request, that is, when the eNB receives the context information saving request, determining that the UE does not need to continue to transmit data within the time, the eNB may send the data to the UE. The context saving indication message carries the first indication information in the context saving indication message.
值得说明的是，UE上下文信息的保存是指在UE侧和网络侧即eNB 都进行上下文信息的保存。此外，在具体实现时，上述上下文信息保存请求也可以称为RRC连接挂起请求消息等，上述携带有第一指示信息的上下文信息保存指示消息也可以称为RRC连接挂起指示消息、RRC连接释放指示消息等，不做具体限制。It should be noted that the preservation of the UE context information refers to the eNB on the UE side and the network side. Both save the context information. In addition, in a specific implementation, the foregoing context information saving request may also be referred to as an RRC connection suspension request message, etc., and the context information saving indication message carrying the first indication information may also be referred to as an RRC connection suspension indication message, an RRC connection. Release the indication message, etc., without specific restrictions.
第二种方式：该第一指示信息是eNB根据与UE的数据传输记录，在确定在预设时间内没有与UE间进行数据传输时发送的。该方式中，eNB也可以是根据与UE进行数据传输的情况，确定UE没有数据需要继续传输时，自主确定可以进行UE的上下文信息的保存(或者等价地称之为RRC连接的挂起或释放)，从而向UE发送上述第一指示信息。The second mode: the first indication information is sent by the eNB according to the data transmission record with the UE, when it is determined that the data transmission is not performed with the UE within a preset time. In this manner, the eNB may also determine, according to the case of performing data transmission with the UE, that the UE does not need data to continue to transmit, and autonomously determines that the context information of the UE may be saved (or equivalently referred to as suspension of the RRC connection or Release), thereby transmitting the above first indication information to the UE.
值得说明的是，eNB在确定UE一定时间内没有传输数据后，并非立刻向UE发送上述第一指示信息，而是需要与核心网设备：MME、SGW交互，以完成网络侧的相关处理，比如UE的承载的挂起处理，在完成相关处理后，才向UE发送的。eNB与核心网设备的交互将在后续实施例中说明，本实施例不赘述。It is to be noted that, after determining that the UE does not transmit data for a certain period of time, the eNB does not immediately send the first indication information to the UE, but needs to interact with the core network device: MME and SGW to complete related processing on the network side, for example, The pending processing of the bearer of the UE is sent to the UE after the relevant processing is completed. The interaction between the eNB and the core network device will be described in the following embodiments, and details are not described in this embodiment.
进而，UE在收到eNB发送的第一指示信息后，执行保存上下文信息。其中，一般地，该上下文信息可以包含UE的无线资源配置信息，安全算法，UE标示符或者称UE的标识信息，测量配置信息等其中的一项或多项。其中，无线资源配置信息可以包含物理层配置信息，MAC层配置信息，RLC层配置信息以及PDCP层配置信息中的一项或多项。其中，UE的标识信息比如包括C-RNTI。Further, after receiving the first indication information sent by the eNB, the UE performs saving context information. Generally, the context information may include one or more of radio resource configuration information, security algorithms, UE identifiers, or UE identification information, measurement configuration information, and the like of the UE. The radio resource configuration information may include one or more of physical layer configuration information, MAC layer configuration information, RLC layer configuration information, and PDCP layer configuration information. The identifier information of the UE includes, for example, a C-RNTI.
值得说明的是，上述第一指示信息的发送，一般是基于如下的通信场景：UE使用上下文信息与基站进行通信结束后，如果一定时间内没有后续数据传输，可能会从RRC连接态进入RRC空闲态并删除上下文信息。为了后续能够基于上下文信息快速恢复网络传输，基站可以在确定UE一定时间内没有进行数据传输后，随即指示UE保存上下文信息，此时，UE所处于的状态不做具体限定，可能是RRC空闲态，也可以是RRC连接态、RRC挂起态等，从而在收到PDCCH时可利用上下文信息中的用户设备标识检测PDCCH中包含的第二指示信息。It should be noted that the foregoing first indication information is generally sent based on the following communication scenario: after the UE uses the context information to communicate with the base station, if there is no subsequent data transmission within a certain period of time, the RRC connection state may enter the RRC idle state. State and delete context information. In order to be able to quickly recover the network transmission based on the context information, the base station may instruct the UE to save the context information after determining that the UE does not perform data transmission within a certain period of time. In this case, the state of the UE is not specifically limited, and may be an RRC idle state. The RRC connection state, the RRC suspension state, and the like may be used, so that when the PDCCH is received, the second indication information included in the PDCCH may be detected by using the user equipment identifier in the context information.
步骤102、UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息。Step 102: The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires the second indication information.
步骤103、UE确定UE为被寻呼对象或者有UE的业务。 Step 103: The UE determines that the UE is a paged object or has a service of the UE.
本实施例中，上述UE的标识信息可以用于在其eNB范围内或者eNB的一个或多个小区范围内唯一标识该UE。In this embodiment, the identifier information of the UE may be used to uniquely identify the UE within its eNB or within one or more cell ranges of the eNB.
实际应用中，如果eNB需要寻呼某个UE，则用该UE的标识信息加扰PDCCH，以发送上述指示信息。In an actual application, if the eNB needs to page a certain UE, the PDCCH is scrambled by using the identification information of the UE to send the indication information.
可选的，根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，可以通过如下方式实现：Optionally, the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the UE, and the second indication information is obtained, which can be implemented as follows:
其一，若根据UE的标识信息正确解码PDCCH中的下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information，简称DCI)格式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息；First, if the downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI) format in the PDCCH is correctly decoded according to the identifier information of the UE, determining that the second indication information is obtained;
或者，or,
其二，根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取PDCCH中DCI格式中包含的第二指示信息。Second, the PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the UE, and the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH is obtained.
也就是说，本实施例中，既可以定义如果UE用其标识信息正确解码了PDCCH中的预设下行控制信息DCI格式，则说明该UE为被寻呼对象或有业务，亦即获得了指示UE为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息；也可以在预设DCI格式中新增第二指示信息的比特定义，如果UE用其标识信息解码出PDCCH中该DCI格式中包含的指示UE为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息，则说明该UE为被寻呼对象或有业务。That is to say, in this embodiment, if the UE correctly decodes the preset downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH by using the identifier information, the UE indicates that the UE is a paged object or has a service, that is, an indication is obtained. The UE is the second indication information of the paged object or the service; the bit definition of the second indication information may be added in the preset DCI format, if the UE uses the identifier information to decode the indication included in the DCI format in the PDCCH. If the UE is the paged object or the second indication information of the service, the UE is the paged object or has the service.
具体地，可以在该DCI格式中仅仅包含1个比特(bit)。例如，当该bit为1时，可以表示UE被寻呼，需要接入网络进行数据传输。当该bit为0时，表示UE当前没有被寻呼。Specifically, only one bit can be included in the DCI format. For example, when the bit is 1, it can indicate that the UE is paged, and needs to access the network for data transmission. When the bit is 0, it indicates that the UE is not currently being paged.
具体实现中，UE可以在搜索公共搜索空间(Common Search Space，简称CSS)或者UE特定的搜索空间(UE Special Space，简称USS)中，采用UE的标识信息解码PDCCH的预设DCI格式，获取第二指示信息。In a specific implementation, the UE may use the identifier information of the UE to decode the preset DCI format of the PDCCH by using the identifier information of the UE in the Common Search Space (CSS) or the UE-specific search space (UES). Two instructions.
另外可选的，除上述用于指示UE是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务的第二指示信息外，在上述DCI格式中还可以包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。以***信息改变指示信息为例，在这种情况下，DCI格式的设计可以是：Optionally, in addition to the foregoing second indication information used to indicate whether the UE is a paged object or whether there is a service, the DCI format may further include system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information. Take the system information change indication information as an example. In this case, the design of the DCI format can be:
第一个bit：寻呼指示信息，用于通知是否有UE的寻呼；The first bit: paging indication information, used to notify whether there is a paging of the UE;
第二个bit：***信息改变指示信息，用于通知是否***信息发送改变。 The second bit: system information change indication information, used to notify whether the system information transmission change.
进一步地，DCI格式中还可以包含如下紧急服务指示信息，例如地震海啸相关的指示信息(Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System Indication，简称ETWS)，商用移动警报服务(Commercial Mobile Alert Service，简称CMAS)以及扩展的接入限制参数修改指示(Extended Access Barring Parameter Modification，简称EABPM)。Further, the DCI format may further include the following emergency service indication information, such as Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System Indication (ETWS), Commercial Mobile Alert Service (CMAS), and extended Extended Access Barring Parameter Modification (EABPM).
本实施例中，UE在接收到eNB发送的第一指示信息后，根据第一指示信息保存UE的上下文信息，其中，该上下文信息中包括UE的标识信息。进而，UE根据该标识信息解码PDCCH，如果能够解码出指示该UE为被寻呼对象或者有UE的业务的第二指示信息，则说明该UE为被寻呼对象或者有业务需要进行传输。通过在PDCCH中携带有针对被寻呼对象的指示信息，使得UE能够基于能否成功获取该指示信息来确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务，在确定自身为被寻呼对象或有业务时，才进行接入网络等后续处理，避免了UE功耗的浪费。In this embodiment, after receiving the first indication information sent by the eNB, the UE saves the context information of the UE according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the UE. Further, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identification information, and if the second indication information indicating that the UE is a paged object or a service of the UE can be decoded, the UE is required to be a paged object or has a service to transmit. By carrying the indication information for the paged object in the PDCCH, the UE can determine whether it is the paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the indication information can be successfully obtained, and determine that it is the paged object or has During the service, the access network and other subsequent processing are performed to avoid waste of power consumption of the UE.
图2为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例二的流程图，如图2所示，具体包括如下步骤：2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes the following steps:
步骤201、UE接收eNB发送的第一指示信息，并根据第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息。Step 201: The UE receives the first indication information sent by the eNB, and saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the user equipment.
步骤202、UE根据第一指示信息保存UE与eNB之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器。Step 202: The UE saves a security key for performing data transmission between the UE and the eNB according to the first indication information, and a data packet counter of the at least one radio bearer.
其中，安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。Wherein the security key contains an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
本实施例中，UE除了保存上下文信息外，还保存上述安全密钥和数据包计数器，或者称为数据包序列号。In this embodiment, in addition to saving context information, the UE also stores the above-mentioned security key and packet counter, or is called a packet sequence number.
其中，该数据包计数器可以是分组数据汇聚协议(Packet Data Convergence Protocol，简称PDCP)的数据包计数器，即PDCP COUNT。The packet counter may be a packet counter of a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), that is, a PDCP COUNT.
例如，在当前的LTE***中，PDCP COUNT格式如下：COUNT值由HFN(Hyper Frame Number)和PDCP SN(Sequence Number)组成：For example, in the current LTE system, the PDCP COUNT format is as follows: The COUNT value is composed of HFN (Hyper Frame Number) and PDCP SN (Sequence Number):
HFNHFN PDCP SNPDCP SN
可以理解的是，如果数据安全处理过程不是在PDCP层，而是在其他 协议层进行，则该计数器的类型适应性改变。Understandably, if the data security process is not in the PDCP layer, but in other When the protocol layer is performed, the type of the counter adapts.
具体来说，保存数据包计数器，可以采用如下两种可选的方式：Specifically, to save the packet counter, you can use the following two options:
方法1：保存下一个要使用的数据包计数器。例如，数据传输传输到了第5号数据包，那么保存的时候就保存6这个数，待接下来恢复数据传输的时候使用。Method 1: Save the next packet counter to be used. For example, if the data transmission is transmitted to the No. 5 data packet, then the number of 6 is saved when it is saved, and is used when the data transmission is resumed next.
方法2：保存当前使用过的最后一个有效的数据包计数器。例如数据包传输传输到了第5号数据包，这个时候就把5这个计数保存下来，下次使用的时候加1，从6开始使用。Method 2: Save the last valid packet counter that has been used. For example, the data packet transmission is transmitted to the No. 5 data packet. At this time, the 5 count is saved, and the next time it is used, it is incremented by 1 and used from 6.
步骤203、UE接收eNB发送的获取方式指示信息。Step 203: The UE receives the acquisition mode indication information sent by the eNB.
该获取方式指示信息用于指示UE获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式。The obtaining mode indication information is used to indicate that the UE acquires the acquiring manner of the second indication information.
该步骤203的时序没有严格的限定，不局限于本实施例中的时序关系。The timing of this step 203 is not strictly limited and is not limited to the timing relationship in this embodiment.
其中，所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following manners:
第一获取方式：UE根据在eNB范围内或者eNB的一个或多个小区范围内标识UE的标识信息正确解码PDCCH中的DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；a first acquisition mode: the UE acquires the second indication information by correctly decoding a DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE that is identified in the eNB or the one or more cell ranges of the eNB;
第二获取方式：UE根据在eNB范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取PDCCH中DCI格式中包含的第二指示信息；a second acquisition mode: the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE that is identified in the eNB or the one or more cell ranges of the base station, and acquires the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH.
第三获取方式：UE根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH，获取第二指示信息。The third acquiring mode is: the UE detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquires the second indication information.
前两种方式，UE的标识信息主要是指C-RNTI，用于唯一性标识UE，第三种方式中，P-RNTI不是唯一性标识UE的，属于共用的标识信息。In the first two modes, the identifier information of the UE mainly refers to the C-RNTI, which is used to uniquely identify the UE. In the third mode, the P-RNTI is not uniquely identified by the UE, and belongs to the shared identifier information.
步骤204、UE在获取方式指示信息指示获取方式为第一获取方式或第二获取方式时，根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息。Step 204: The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires the second indication information, when the acquiring mode indication information indicates that the acquiring mode is the first acquiring mode or the second acquiring mode.
根据前两种获取方式获取指示信息的过程，已经在前述实施例中说明，本实施例中不再赘述。The process of obtaining the indication information according to the first two acquisition manners has been described in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described in this embodiment.
在获取方式指示信息指示第三获取方式时，UE根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH以获取到第二指示信息，此时，该第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息，进而，UE根据该调度信息从PDSCH上接收到UE对应的寻呼消息，根据寻呼消息确定UE为被寻呼对象或有UE的业务。其中，该调度信息是指PDSCH上接 收寻呼消息的时频资源。When the acquisition mode indication information indicates the third acquisition mode, the UE detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information. At this time, the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message, and further, the UE according to the scheduling information. A paging message corresponding to the UE is received from the PDSCH, and the UE is determined to be a paged object or a service of the UE according to the paging message. The scheduling information refers to the PDSCH connection. Time-frequency resources for receiving paging messages.
步骤205、UE根据第二指示信息确定UE为被寻呼对象或者有UE的业务。Step 205: The UE determines, according to the second indication information, that the UE is a paged object or a service of the UE.
步骤206、UE接收eNB发送的需要恢复的无线承载标识，根据需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定需要恢复的无线承载。Step 206: The UE receives the radio bearer identifier that is sent by the eNB and needs to be restored, and determines the radio bearer that needs to be restored according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
该无线承载标识可以包含在所述第二指示信息中，或者也可以包含在寻呼消息中。The radio bearer identifier may be included in the second indication information or may also be included in a paging message.
步骤207、UE使用安全密钥和需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对该需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。Step 207: The UE performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered by using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored.
此时，具体地执行数据传输的方法与上面两种保存的方法对应，有两种方式：At this time, the method of specifically performing data transmission corresponds to the above two methods of saving, and there are two ways:
方式1：对应方法1，从保存的6开始使用。Method 1: Corresponding to Method 1, starting with the saved 6.
方式2：对应方法2，对保存的5加1后开始使用。Method 2: Corresponding to Method 2, start using the saved 5 plus one.
本实施例中，eNB在发起针对UE的寻呼或业务处理之后，根据需要进行的业务处理确定对应的需要恢复的无线承载标识，进而向UE发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，从而，UE根据需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定需要恢复的无线承载，进而使用保存的安全密钥和保存的需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对该需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。In this embodiment, after initiating the paging or service processing for the UE, the eNB determines the corresponding radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored according to the service processing that needs to be performed, and then sends the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored to the UE, so that the UE needs The recovered radio bearer identifier determines the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and then performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered using the saved security key and the saved packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered.
具体来说，当UE有上行数据需要发送时，UE执行针对该需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输，包括：使用安全密钥和需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用该加密密钥流对上行数据加密后发送给eNB。Specifically, when the UE has uplink data to be transmitted, the UE performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be restored, including: generating a cipher key stream by using a security key and a packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored, using the The encrypted key stream encrypts the uplink data and sends it to the eNB.
具体地，UE对加密后的上行数据的发送，可以根据eNB预先分配的基于竞争的物理上行共享信道(Contention Based PUSCH，简称CB-PUSCH)资源通过竞争的方式发送该上行数据。Specifically, the UE transmits the uplink data to the encrypted uplink data in a contentive manner according to a contention-based physical uplink shared channel (CB-PUSCH) resource allocated in advance by the eNB.
具体来说，当UE有下行数据需要接收时，使用安全密钥和需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。Specifically, when the UE has downlink data to be received, the received downlink data is decrypted using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered.
值得说明的是，当UE获取到指示UE为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息后，说明该UE有下行数据需要接收，触发上述接收下行数据的处理。如果UE在此过程中有上行数据需要发送，触发上述发送上行数据的处理。It is to be noted that, after the UE obtains the second indication information indicating that the UE is the paged object or has the service, it indicates that the UE has downlink data to be received, and triggers the processing of receiving the downlink data. If the UE needs to send uplink data in the process, the process of sending the uplink data is triggered.
本实施例中，通过在PDCCH中携带有针对被寻呼对象的第二指示信息， 使得UE能够基于能否成功获取该第二指示信息来确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务，在确定自身为被寻呼对象或有业务时，才进行数据传输的处理，避免了UE功耗的浪费。In this embodiment, by carrying the second indication information for the paged object in the PDCCH, The UE can enable the UE to determine whether it is a paged object or whether there is a service based on whether the second indication information can be successfully obtained, and perform data transmission processing when determining that it is a paged object or has a service, thereby avoiding the UE. Waste of power consumption.
图3为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例三的流程图，如图3所示，在前述各实施例的基础上，UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，可以通过如下步骤301实现：FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, on the basis of the foregoing embodiments, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains the second indication information. This can be achieved by the following step 301:
步骤301、UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取eNB在UE对应的一个PO以及PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息。Step 301: The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires N pieces of second indication information that are continuously sent by the eNB on one PO corresponding to the UE and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO.
或者可选的，UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，还可以通过如下方式实现：Alternatively, the UE may decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtain the second indication information, which may also be implemented as follows:
UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息。The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment.
进而，获得第二指示信息之后还包括如下的接收下行数据的步骤：Further, after obtaining the second indication information, the method further includes the following steps of receiving downlink data:
步骤302、UE接收eNB发送的下行数据接收时机配置信息，下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据。Step 302: The UE receives the downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the eNB, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that the downlink data is received after the m subframes after the second indication information is acquired.
步骤303、UE根据下行数据接收时机配置信息，接收下行数据。Step 303: The UE receives the downlink data according to the downlink data receiving timing configuration information.
其中，m为大于或等于0的整数。Where m is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
本实施例中，为了保证寻呼可靠性，即UE能够更加准确地确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或有业务，以使得后续数据传输的触发更加准确、可靠，提供了多次发送用于指示UE是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务的第二指示信息的方案。In this embodiment, in order to ensure paging reliability, that is, the UE can determine whether it is a paged object or has a service more accurately, so that the triggering of subsequent data transmission is more accurate and reliable, and multiple transmissions are provided for indication. Whether the UE is the object to be paged or whether there is a second indication information of the service.
具体来说，eNB在发送N次第二指示信息之后，可以直接向UE发送下行数据。其中，这N次第二指示信息的发送，可以是连续发送的，也可以是不连续发送的。Specifically, after transmitting the Nth indication information N times, the eNB may directly send downlink data to the UE. The sending of the Nth second indication information may be consecutively sent or may be discontinuously sent.
具体的，对于连续发送的方式：eNB计算UE对应的一个PO，在该PO以及该PO之后的N-1个连续子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息，具体的是通过UE的标识信息加扰PDCCH分别发送N次携带有第二指示信息的预设DCI格式，或者，分别发送N次预设的DCI格式，并在发送完N次后，可以 直接向UE发送下行数据。相应的，UE在根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取eNB在UE对应的一个PO以及PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息后，尝试接收下行数据。Specifically, for the manner of continuous transmission, the eNB calculates one PO corresponding to the UE, and continuously sends N second indication information on the PO and the N-1 consecutive subframes after the PO, specifically, the identifier information of the UE. The scrambled PDCCH sends the preset DCI format carrying the second indication information N times, or sends the preset DCI format N times, and after sending N times, Send downlink data directly to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires N pieces of second indication information that are continuously sent by the eNB after the PO corresponding to the UE and the consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO, and then attempts to receive the downlink data.
值得说明的是，在该方式中，eNB发送下行数据的时机可以是在连续发送完N次第二指示信息之后的m个子帧后，相应的，UE在获得N次第二指示信息后的m个子帧后，接收下行数据。It should be noted that, in this manner, the timing at which the eNB sends the downlink data may be after the m subframes after the N times of the second indication information are continuously sent, and correspondingly, after the UE obtains the N times of the second indication information, After the sub-frames, the downlink data is received.
对于不连续发送的方式：eNB计算UE对应的N个不同PO，并在每个PO通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息。相应的，UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取eNB在UE对应的N个不同PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息后，尝试接收下行数据。该方式中，由于UE并不知道自己获得的指示信息是eNB发送的第几次，因此，UE在获得第二指示信息后即尝试接收下行数据。For the discontinuous transmission mode, the eNB calculates N different POs corresponding to the UE, and sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH in each PO. Correspondingly, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains any one of the second indication information that is sent by the eNB on the N different POs corresponding to the UE, and then attempts to receive the downlink data. In this manner, since the UE does not know that the indication information obtained by the UE is the first time sent by the eNB, the UE attempts to receive the downlink data after obtaining the second indication information.
在图3所示实施例中，在UE确定自己为被寻呼对象或有业务后，如果是有下行数据需要接收，即接收到上述第二指示信息说明UE有下行数据需要接收，则UE即可根据该实施例中的方式直接接收下行数据。如果UE有上行数据需要发送，UE一般需要向eNB请求资源，以根据eNB分配的资源进行上行数据的发送。这便涉及到数据传输恢复的处理过程，将在后续实施例中详细说明。对于下行数据的接收过程和上行数据的发送过程可以参考图2实施例中的具体描述。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, after the UE determines that it is a paged object or has a service, if there is downlink data to be received, that is, if the second indication information is received, the UE has downlink data to be received, the UE is The downlink data can be directly received according to the manner in this embodiment. If the UE has uplink data to be transmitted, the UE generally needs to request resources from the eNB to perform uplink data transmission according to resources allocated by the eNB. This involves the processing of data transfer recovery, which will be explained in detail in subsequent embodiments. For the process of receiving the downlink data and the process of transmitting the uplink data, reference may be made to the specific description in the embodiment of FIG. 2.
值得说明的是，除了上行数据发送可能会触发数据传输恢复过程外，下行数据接收也会触发数据传输恢复过程。只是在图3实施例中，基于上述两种可选的第二指示信息发送方式，eNB可以在发送完N次第二指示信息后，随即发送下行数据。It is worth noting that, in addition to the uplink data transmission may trigger the data transmission recovery process, the downlink data reception also triggers the data transmission recovery process. In the embodiment of FIG. 3, the eNB may send the downlink data immediately after the Nth second indication information is sent, based on the two optional second indication information transmission manners.
图4为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例四的流程图，如图4所示，在前述各实施例的基础上，以图1所示实施例为例，在UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息之后，还可以包括如下步骤：FIG. 4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4, based on the foregoing embodiments, the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and the UE is based on the UE. After the identifier information is decoded into the PDCCH, and the second indication information is obtained, the following steps may be further included:
步骤401、UE利用获得的上行反馈资源，向eNB发送获取反馈信息，该获取反馈信息用于指示UE成功获取了第二指示信息。Step 401: The UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, where the acquisition feedback information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information.
步骤402、UE接收eNB发送的资源配置信息。 Step 402: The UE receives resource configuration information sent by the eNB.
步骤403、UE根据资源配置信息向eNB发送RRC连接请求消息。Step 403: The UE sends an RRC connection request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
本实施例中，UE为了恢复数据传输，一般会通过RRC连接建立、RRC连接重建立、RRC连接恢复等过程恢复数据传输，在此过程中，UE需要向eNB发送RRC连接请求消息，相应的，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。In this embodiment, the UE resumes data transmission by using an RRC connection setup, an RRC connection re-establishment, and an RRC connection recovery process, in order to recover the data transmission. In this process, the UE needs to send an RRC connection request message to the eNB, and correspondingly, The RRC Connection Request message includes an RRC Connection Recovery Request message, or an RRC Connection Setup Request message, or an RRC Connection Re-establishment Request message.
发送RRC连接请求消息需要使用相应的资源，因此，eNB需要为UE分配该资源，用于UE进行RRC连接请求消息的发送。The RRC connection request message needs to use the corresponding resource. Therefore, the eNB needs to allocate the resource to the UE for the UE to perform the RRC connection request message transmission.
为了避免eNB资源分配的浪费，本实施例中提供了如下的反馈机制：In order to avoid waste of eNB resource allocation, the following feedback mechanism is provided in this embodiment:
具体的，当UE通过自身的标识信息解码PDCCH获取到指示UE为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息后，UE利用预先获得的上行反馈资源，向eNB发送获取反馈信息，该获取反馈信息用于指示UE成功获取了第二指示信息。当UE接收到该反馈信息后，为UE分配资源，向UE发送资源配置信息，以使UE根据资源配置信息向eNB发送RRC连接请求消息。Specifically, after the UE obtains the second indication information indicating that the UE is the paged object or has the service, the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB by using the uplink feedback resource obtained in advance, and the acquisition feedback is obtained. The information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information. After receiving the feedback information, the UE allocates resources to the UE, and sends resource configuration information to the UE, so that the UE sends an RRC connection request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
其中，所述上行反馈资源包括SR资源，或者eNB根据UE对应的PO确定的上行子帧。The uplink feedback resource includes an SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the eNB according to the PO corresponding to the UE.
比如，eNB在UE对应的某个PO之后的第x个上行子帧上配置一个资源。该资源可以传递个物理层信号，类似现在ACK/NACK反馈，也可以反馈一个高层消息，指示成功接收到第二指示信息与否。For example, the eNB configures a resource on the xth uplink subframe after a certain PO corresponding to the UE. The resource may transmit a physical layer signal, similar to the current ACK/NACK feedback, or may feed back a high-level message indicating whether the second indication information is successfully received or not.
本实施例中，所述上行反馈资源是UE专有资源，因为eNB能够获知某个PO，分别寻呼了或者可能寻呼哪些UE，并且eNB中存储的有这些UE的上下文信息，所以，eNB可以针对该PO上寻呼的UE，分配UE专有的资源。所谓UE专有的资源，是为了eNB能够无歧义的识别进行反馈的UE，从而可以无歧义的确定监听到指示信息的UE。In this embodiment, the uplink feedback resource is a UE-specific resource, because the eNB can learn a certain PO, which UEs are paged or possibly paged, and the eNB stores the context information of the UEs. Therefore, the eNB UE-specific resources may be allocated for UEs that are paged on the PO. The UE-specific resource is a UE that performs feedback for the eNB to be unambiguously identified, so that the UE that has received the indication information can be determined unambiguously.
按照现有协议，某个UE的PO时，eNB实际上并不一定会发送该UE的寻呼。可以只为eNB实际发送寻呼的UE分配专有资源，其次，为了减少UE反馈的次数，UE可以只在其成功接收到针对该UE的寻呼即第二指示信息之后反馈，没有接收到的情况下不反馈，即使网络发送了该UE的指示信息，并且为该UE的反馈分配了专有资源。 According to the existing protocol, when the PO of a certain UE is used, the eNB does not actually send the paging of the UE. The UE may only allocate dedicated resources for the UE that actually sends the paging, and secondly, in order to reduce the number of times the UE feeds back, the UE may only feedback after it successfully receives the paging, that is, the second indication information for the UE, and does not receive the received information. In the case of no feedback, even if the network sends the indication information of the UE, and the dedicated resources are allocated for the feedback of the UE.
UE根据是否成功获得第二指示信息的情况，在上述配置的上行反馈资源上进行反馈：如果成功获取到自己的第二指示信息，则反馈成功，否则反馈失败，或者不反馈。The UE performs feedback on the uplink feedback resource configured according to whether the second indication information is successfully obtained. If the second indication information of the UE is successfully obtained, the feedback is successful, otherwise the feedback fails, or no feedback.
上述eNB在接收到获取反馈信息后为UE分配请求资源的方式，尤其适用于eNB有下行数据发送给UE的情况下，对于UE有上行数据需发送给eNB的情况，还可以有如下可选的方式：The manner in which the eNB allocates the request resource after the eNB obtains the feedback information, and is particularly applicable to the case that the eNB has the downlink data to be sent to the UE, and if the UE has the uplink data to be sent to the eNB, the eNB may also have the following optional the way:
UE通过SR资源向eNB发送资源请求，其中，SR资源中包括成功获取第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息；The UE sends a resource request to the eNB by using the SR resource, where the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted;
UE接收eNB发送的资源配置信息；Receiving, by the UE, resource configuration information sent by the eNB;
UE根据资源配置信息向eNB发送RRC连接请求消息。The UE sends an RRC Connection Request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
与通过SR资源向eNB反馈获取指示信息不同，此时为UE配置周期性的SR资源，该SR资源是用于向eNB请求资源的，其中包括的获取反馈信息、有上行数据需传输的指示信息，可以理解为是告知eNB请求资源的原因。The method is configured to send the indication information to the eNB by using the SR resource. In this case, the UE is configured with a periodic SR resource, where the SR resource is used to request resources from the eNB, and the received feedback information and the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted. It can be understood as the reason for informing the eNB to request a resource.
本实施例中，UE在通过解码PDCCH获取第二指示信息，根据第二指示信息确定自己为被寻呼对象或有业务时，向eNB发送获取反馈信息，以告知eNB其已经成功获取第二指示信息，从而使得eNB为UE分配发送RRC连接请求消息所使用的资源，以恢复数据传输更加具有针对性，避免导致分配的资源的浪费。In this embodiment, when the UE obtains the second indication information by decoding the PDCCH, and determines that it is the paged object or the service according to the second indication information, the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB to inform the eNB that the second indication has been successfully obtained. The information is such that the eNB allocates resources used by the RRC connection request message to the UE to restore data transmission more targeted and avoid waste of allocated resources.
图3所示实施例中通过多次通过PDCCH发送指示信息，以通过提高寻呼可靠性的方式，避免分配用于发送RRC连接请求消息所用的资源的浪费，图4所示实施例通过控制分配该资源的时机的方式，避免分配的资源的浪费，下面，结合图5所示实施例，从分配该资源的具体分配方式的角度，提供另一种避免资源浪费的方案。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the indication information is sent through the PDCCH multiple times to avoid waste of resources used for transmitting the RRC connection request message by improving the paging reliability. The embodiment shown in FIG. 4 is controlled by the control. The timing of the resource avoids the waste of the allocated resources. In the following, in combination with the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, another scheme for avoiding resource waste is provided from the perspective of assigning a specific allocation manner of the resource.
图5为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例五的流程图，如图5所示，在图1所示实施例基础上，步骤103之后，该方法还可以包括：FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 5, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, after the step 103, the method may further include:
步骤501、UE接收eNB发送的资源配置信息，该资源配置信息包括根据UE对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源； Step 501: The UE receives the resource configuration information that is sent by the eNB, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource that is determined according to a PO corresponding to the UE and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
步骤502、UE根据该CB-PUSCH资源发送RRC连接请求。Step 502: The UE sends an RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
本实施例中，RRC连接请求消息是基于CB-PUSCH方式的：定义CB-PUSCH的资源配置和发送用于指示UE是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务的第二指示信息的发送资源，比如寻呼时刻PO之间的关系。In this embodiment, the RRC connection request message is based on the CB-PUSCH mode: a resource configuration for defining a CB-PUSCH and a transmission resource for transmitting a second indication information indicating whether the UE is a paged object or whether there is a service, such as The relationship between paging moments PO.
比如在连续的两次PO之间，eNB定义X个可用的CB-PUSCH资源，以使得eNB再次发送第二指示信息之前，可以保证UE进行最大X次的RRC连接请求消息的竞争发送。For example, between two consecutive POs, the eNB defines X available CB-PUSCH resources, so that the eNB can perform the contention transmission of the maximum X times RRC connection request message before the eNB sends the second indication information again.
本实施例中，通过在确定的UE对应的PO与相邻的至少一个PO之间，配置CB-PUSCH资源，使得UE仅在该CB-PUSCH资源进行RRC连接请求消息的竞争发送，降低了CB-PUSCH资源的浪费。In this embodiment, the CB-PUSCH resource is configured between the PO corresponding to the UE and the at least one PO, so that the UE performs the contention of the RRC connection request message only on the CB-PUSCH resource, and reduces the CB. - Waste of PUSCH resources.
图6为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例六的流程图，该实施例的执行主体为基站(eNB)，如图6所示，该方法包括如下步骤：FIG. 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. The execution entity of the embodiment is a base station (eNB). As shown in FIG. 6, the method includes the following steps:
步骤601、eNB向UE发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示UE根据第一指示信息保存UE的上下文信息，上下文信息中包括的UE的标识信息。Step 601: The eNB sends the first indication information to the UE, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the UE saves the context information of the UE and the identifier information of the UE included in the context information according to the first indication information.
步骤602、eNB通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示UE在根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH获取第二指示信息时，确定UE为被寻呼对象或者有UE的业务。Step 602: The eNB sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the UE determines that the UE is the paged object or the service of the UE when the PDCCH is used to obtain the second indication information according to the identifier information of the UE.
具体的，与图1所示实施例中相似，eNB可以通过如下方式确定UE在预设时间内是否有进行数据传输，在没有进行数据传输时，发送上述第一指示信息：Specifically, similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, the eNB may determine whether the UE performs data transmission within a preset time by using the following manner: when the data transmission is not performed, sending the first indication information:
接收UE发送的上下文信息保存请求，上下文信息保存请求是UE在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时发送的；Receiving a context information saving request sent by the UE, where the context information saving request is sent when the UE does not need to transmit data within a preset time;
根据上下文信息保存请求确定UE在预设时间内没有进行数据传输，保存UE的上下文信息，并向UE发送第一指示信息。The system determines that the UE does not perform data transmission within a preset time according to the context information saving request, saves the context information of the UE, and sends the first indication information to the UE.
另外，eNB也可以是基于与UE的数据传输记录，在确定在预设时间内没有与UE间进行数据传输时发送第一指示信息。In addition, the eNB may also be based on the data transmission record with the UE, and send the first indication information when it is determined that the data transmission is not performed with the UE within a preset time.
进而，当网络有业务需要寻呼UE时，MME通知eNB对UE发起寻呼，则此时eNB通过PDCCH向UE发送用于指示UE为被寻呼对象或有 业务的第二指示信息。Further, when the network has a service that needs to page the UE, the MME notifies the eNB to initiate paging to the UE, and then the eNB sends a message to the UE by using the PDCCH to indicate that the UE is the paged object or has The second indication of the service.
具体地，eNB对该第二指示信息的发送，可以是将该第二指示信息携带于预设DCI格式中通过PDCCH发送，或者通过PDCCH发送预设DCI格式的方式发送该第二指示信息。而且，在通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息的时候，是采用UE的标识信息对该PDCCH进行加扰后发送的。其中，UE的标识信息比如可以是C-RNTI，P-RNTI。尤其的，本实施例该UE的标识信息是指用于在覆盖UE的eNB范围内或者eNB的一个或多个小区范围内唯一标识UE的标识，比如C-RNTI。Specifically, the sending, by the eNB, the second indication information may be sent by using the PDCCH in the preset DCI format, or sending the second indication information by using a PDCCH to send a preset DCI format. Moreover, when the second indication information is sent by using the PDCCH, the PDCCH is scrambled by using the identifier information of the UE. The identifier information of the UE may be, for example, a C-RNTI or a P-RNTI. In particular, the identifier information of the UE in this embodiment refers to an identifier, such as a C-RNTI, for uniquely identifying a UE within a range of eNBs covering the UE or within one or more cells of the eNB.
eNB通过PDCCH发送出上述第二指示信息后，UE根据自身的标识信息解码PDCCH，以根据该第二指示信息确定自身为被寻呼对象或有业务。After the eNB sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to its own identification information, so as to determine that it is a paged object or has a service according to the second indication information.
可选的，UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，可以通过如下方式实现：Optionally, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains the second indication information, which can be implemented by:
其一，若根据UE的标识信息正确解码PDCCH中的DCI格式，则确定获取到该第二指示信息；First, if the DCI format in the PDCCH is correctly decoded according to the identifier information of the UE, determining that the second indication information is obtained;
或者，or,
其二，UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取PDCCH中DCI格式中包含的该第二指示信息。Second, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH.
也就是说，本实施例中，既可以定义如果UE用其标识信息正确解码了PDCCH中的预设DCI格式，则说明该UE为被寻呼对象或有业务，亦即获得了指示UE为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息；也可以在预设DCI格式中新增第二指示信息的比特定义，如果UE用其标识信息解码出PDCCH中预设DCI格式中包含的指示UE为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息，则说明该UE为被寻呼对象或有业务。That is, in this embodiment, it may be defined that if the UE correctly decodes the preset DCI format in the PDCCH with its identification information, it indicates that the UE is a paged object or has a service, that is, the UE is instructed to be Paging the second indication information of the object or the service; or adding the bit definition of the second indication information to the preset DCI format, if the UE uses the identification information to decode the indication UE included in the preset DCI format in the PDCCH The second indication information of the paged object or the service indicates that the UE is a paged object or has a service.
另外，eNB在所述DCI格式中除了第二指示信息外，还可以包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息，以告知UE***信息发送了改变，或者，有什么具体的紧急服务信息。In addition, the eNB may include system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information in addition to the second indication information in the DCI format, to inform the UE that the system information is sent, or what specific emergency service information is available. .
可选的，本实施例中，为了兼容现有寻呼方式，本实施例中，eNB还为UE配置上述第二指示信息的获取方式，具体来说，还可以包括如下步骤：Optionally, in this embodiment, in order to be compatible with the existing paging mode, in this embodiment, the eNB further configures the acquiring manner of the foregoing second indication information for the UE, and specifically includes the following steps:
步骤603、eNB向UE发送获取方式指示信息，获取方式指示信息用 于指示UE获取第二指示信息的获取方式。Step 603: The eNB sends the acquisition mode indication information to the UE, where the acquisition mode indication information is used. The method for obtaining the second indication information is obtained by the UE.
该步骤603与前述步骤601没有严格的时序限定关系。This step 603 does not have a strict timing constraint relationship with the aforementioned step 601.
其中，所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following manners:
第一获取方式：根据在eNB范围内或者eNB的一个或多个小区范围内标识UE的标识信息正确解码PDCCH中的DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first obtaining mode is: acquiring the second indication information by correctly decoding the DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE that is identified in the eNB or the one or more cell ranges of the eNB;
第二获取方式：根据在eNB范围内或者eNB的一个或多个小区范围内标识UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取PDCCH中DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；The second obtaining mode is: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the UE in the range of the eNB or the one or more cells of the eNB, and acquiring the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
前两种获取方式，UE的标识信息主要是指C-RNTI，用于唯一性标识UE，第三种获取方式中，P-RNTI不是唯一性标识UE的，属于共用的标识信息。In the first two acquisition modes, the identification information of the UE mainly refers to the C-RNTI, which is used to uniquely identify the UE. In the third acquisition mode, the P-RNTI is not uniquely identified by the UE, and belongs to the shared identification information.
对于上述获取方式的配置，eNB可以根据UE的处理能力为UE配置具体的获取方式，比如UE的处理能力较高时，配置第三种获取方式，反之，配置前两种获取方式。For the configuration of the foregoing acquisition mode, the eNB may configure a specific acquisition mode for the UE according to the processing capability of the UE. For example, when the processing capability of the UE is high, the third acquisition mode is configured. Otherwise, the first two acquisition modes are configured.
UE在接收到获取方式指示信息指示获取方式为第一获取方式或第二获取方式时，根据UE的标识信息比如C-RNTI解码PDCCH，获取第二指示信息。在获取方式指示信息指示第三获取方式时，UE根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH以获取到第二指示信息，此时，该第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息，进而，UE根据该调度信息从PDSCH上接收到UE对应的寻呼消息，根据寻呼消息确定UE为被寻呼对象或有UE的业务。When receiving the acquisition mode indication information, the UE obtains the second indication information according to the identifier information of the UE, such as the C-RNTI, to decode the PDCCH. When the acquisition mode indication information indicates the third acquisition mode, the UE detects the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information. At this time, the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message, and further, the UE according to the scheduling information. A paging message corresponding to the UE is received from the PDSCH, and the UE is determined to be a paged object or a service of the UE according to the paging message.
本实施例中，eNB在对UE进行寻呼时，通过PDCCH发送指示UE是否为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息，使得UE根据自身的标识信息解码PDCCH获取该第二指示信息后，能够准确确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或有业务，如果是，则UE进行后续的数据传输处理，否则，不触发后续处理，避免了UE功耗的浪费。In this embodiment, when the eNB is paging the UE, the eNB sends a second indication information indicating whether the UE is a paged object or has a service, so that the UE decodes the PDCCH according to its own identification information, and obtains the second indication information. The UE can accurately determine whether it is a paged object or has a service. If yes, the UE performs subsequent data transmission processing. Otherwise, subsequent processing is not triggered, thereby avoiding waste of power consumption of the UE.
值得说明的是，eNB在向UE发送第一指示信息后，UE不但进行上下文信息的保存处理，还保存UE与eNB之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器。It is to be noted that, after the eNB sends the first indication information to the UE, the UE not only performs the process of saving the context information, but also the security key for performing data transmission between the UE and the eNB and the data packet counter of the at least one radio bearer.
从而，UE在根据第二指示信息确定UE为被寻呼对象或有UE的业务 之后，还确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用保存的安全密钥和需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。其中，安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。Therefore, the UE determines, according to the second indication information, that the UE is a paged object or has a UE. Thereafter, the radio bearer that needs to be recovered is also determined, and the data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered is performed using the saved security key and the packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered. Wherein the security key contains an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
也就是说，UE在确定UE为被寻呼对象或有UE的业务之后，触发数据传输恢复的处理过程，以接收业务的下行数据，或者发送上行数据。That is, after determining that the UE is a paged object or a service of the UE, the UE triggers a process of data transmission recovery to receive downlink data of the service or send uplink data.
为了使得UE知道应该恢复哪个无线承载，eNB还需要进行如下如图7所示的处理过程：In order for the UE to know which radio bearer should be recovered, the eNB also needs to perform the following process as shown in FIG. 7:
图7为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例七的流程图，该实施例的执行主体为基站(eNB)，如图7所示，在图6所示实施例基础上，步骤602之后，该方法还可以包括如下步骤：FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. The execution body of the embodiment is a base station (eNB). As shown in FIG. 7, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, step 602 is performed. After that, the method may further include the following steps:
步骤701、eNB向UE发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，该需要恢复的无线承载标识用于指示UE根据需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定需要恢复的无线承载。Step 701: The eNB sends a radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored to the UE, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the UE to determine the radio bearer that needs to be restored according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
该无线承载标识可以包含在所述第二指示信息中，或者也可以包含在寻呼消息中。The radio bearer identifier may be included in the second indication information or may also be included in a paging message.
针对向UE发送下行数据的情况，eNB知道下行数据所对应的无线承载标识，从而向UE发送该无线承载标识以告知UE需要恢复的是哪个无线承载。For the case of transmitting downlink data to the UE, the eNB knows the radio bearer identifier corresponding to the downlink data, so that the radio bearer identifier is sent to the UE to inform the UE which radio bearer needs to be recovered.
进而，针对向UE发送下行数据的情况，执行步骤702；针对UE向eNB发送上行数据的情况，执行步骤703和步骤704：Further, in the case of transmitting downlink data to the UE, step 702 is performed; and in the case where the UE transmits uplink data to the eNB, step 703 and step 704 are performed:
步骤702、eNB向UE发送下行数据，以使UE在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用安全密钥和需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。Step 702: The eNB sends downlink data to the UE, so that when determining that the downlink data needs to be received, the UE uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received downlink data.
步骤703、eNB向UE发送CB-PUSCH资源，该CB-PUSCH资源用于指示UE根据CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送上行数据。Step 703: The eNB sends a CB-PUSCH resource to the UE, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to instruct the UE to send uplink data according to the CB-PUSCH resource in a contention manner.
步骤704、eNB接收UE发送的上行数据。Step 704: The eNB receives uplink data sent by the UE.
其中，该上行数据是UE在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用安全密钥和需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用加密密钥流对上行数据加密后发送的。The uplink data is generated by the UE using a security key and a data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored when the uplink data needs to be sent, and the encrypted data stream is encrypted by using the encryption key stream.
本实施例中，可选的，在UE发送上行数据时，UE知道上行数据对应的无线承载，恢复该无线承载。在对上行数据进行发送时，可以使用eNB预先 分配的CB-PUSCH资源，通过竞争发送的方式发送上行数据。In this embodiment, optionally, when the UE sends the uplink data, the UE knows the radio bearer corresponding to the uplink data, and restores the radio bearer. When transmitting uplink data, the eNB can be used in advance. The allocated CB-PUSCH resource transmits uplink data by means of contention transmission.
下面，结合图8所示实施例，对eNB具体发送上述指示信息的方式以及发送下行数据的方式进行说明。In the following, with reference to the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the manner in which the eNB specifically transmits the indication information and the manner in which the downlink data is transmitted will be described.
图8为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例八的流程图，该实施例的执行主体为基站(eNB)，如图8所示，在图6所示实施例基础上，所述通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，可以通过如下步骤实现：FIG. 8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. The execution body of the embodiment is a base station (eNB), as shown in FIG. 8, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. The sending of the second indication information by using the PDCCH may be implemented by the following steps:
步骤801、eNB向UE发送下行数据接收时机配置信息，下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据。Step 801: The eNB sends downlink data reception timing configuration information to the UE, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that the downlink data is received after obtaining the second indication information.
m为大于或等于0的整数。m is an integer greater than or equal to zero.
步骤802、eNB通过PDCCH，在UE对应的一个PO以及该PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息。Step 802: The eNB continuously sends N pieces of second indication information on a PO corresponding to the UE and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO by using the PDCCH.
或者，eNB也可以通过PDCCH，在UE对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送第二指示信息。Alternatively, the eNB may separately send the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the UE by using the PDCCH.
本实施例中，为了保证寻呼可靠性，即UE能够更加准确地确定自身是否为被寻呼对象或有业务，以使得后续数据传输的触发更加准确、可靠，提供了多次发送用于指示UE是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务的指示信息的方案。In this embodiment, in order to ensure paging reliability, that is, the UE can determine whether it is a paged object or has a service more accurately, so that the triggering of subsequent data transmission is more accurate and reliable, and multiple transmissions are provided for indication. Whether the UE is a paged object or a scheme of whether or not there is indication of a service.
具体来说，eNB在发送N次第二指示信息之后，可以直接向UE发送下行数据。其中，这N次第二指示信息的发送，可以是连续发送的，也可以是不连续发送的。Specifically, after transmitting the Nth indication information N times, the eNB may directly send downlink data to the UE. The sending of the Nth second indication information may be consecutively sent or may be discontinuously sent.
具体的，对于连续发送的方式：eNB计算UE对应的一个PO，在该PO以及该PO之后的N-1个连续子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息，具体的是通过UE的标识信息加扰PDCCH分别发送N次携带有第二指示信息预设DCI格式，或者，分别发送N次预设的DCI格式，并在发送完N次后，可以直接向UE发送下行数据。相应的，UE在根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取eNB在UE对应的一个PO以及PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息后，尝试接收下行数据。Specifically, for the manner of continuous transmission, the eNB calculates one PO corresponding to the UE, and continuously sends N second indication information on the PO and the N-1 consecutive subframes after the PO, specifically, the identifier information of the UE. The scrambled PDCCH is sent N times to carry the preset DCI format with the second indication information, or the NDP format is sent N times, and after the N times, the downlink data can be directly sent to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and acquires N pieces of second indication information that are continuously sent by the eNB after the PO corresponding to the UE and the consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO, and then attempts to receive the downlink data.
值得说明的是，在该方式中，eNB发送下行数据的时机可以是在连续发 送完N次第二指示信息之后的m个子帧后，从而，eNB告之UE其发送下行数据的时机，亦即UE接收下行数据的时机。相应的，UE在获得N次第二指示信息后的m个子帧后，接收下行数据。It should be noted that, in this manner, the timing at which the eNB sends downlink data may be continuous. After the m subframes after the Nth second indication information are sent, the eNB informs the UE of the timing of transmitting the downlink data, that is, the timing at which the UE receives the downlink data. Correspondingly, after receiving the m subframes after the N times of the second indication information, the UE receives the downlink data.
对于不连续发送的方式：eNB计算UE对应的N个不同PO，并在每个PO通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息。相应的，UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取eNB在UE对应的N个不同PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息后，尝试接收下行数据。该方式中，由于UE并不知道自己获得的第二指示信息是eNB发送的第几次，因此，UE在获得第二指示信息后即尝试接收下行数据。For the discontinuous transmission mode, the eNB calculates N different POs corresponding to the UE, and sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH in each PO. Correspondingly, the UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and obtains any one of the second indication information that is sent by the eNB on the N different POs corresponding to the UE, and then attempts to receive the downlink data. In this manner, since the UE does not know that the second indication information obtained by the UE is the first time sent by the eNB, the UE attempts to receive the downlink data after obtaining the second indication information.
本实施例中，通过多次发送第二指示信息的方式，保证UE能够可靠的接收到eNB的寻呼，从而使得后续的数据传输更加可靠，避免UE功耗等资源的浪费。In this embodiment, the second indication information is sent multiple times to ensure that the UE can reliably receive the paging of the eNB, so that subsequent data transmission is more reliable, and waste of resources such as UE power consumption is avoided.
前述各实施例，从发送第二指示信息的角度，以保证UE更可靠地接收到eNB的寻呼，避免了UE功耗等资源的浪费，下面，结合图9所示实施例，从数据传输恢复的角度，具体从数据传输恢复时，发送RRC连接请求消息的资源分配角度，通过更加准确、可靠地分配该资源，进一步避免发送RRC连接请求消息的资源的浪费。In the foregoing embodiments, from the perspective of sending the second indication information, the UE is more reliable to receive the paging of the eNB, and the waste of resources such as the power consumption of the UE is avoided. In the following, the data transmission is performed in combination with the embodiment shown in FIG. In the recovery perspective, when the data transmission is resumed, the resource allocation angle of the RRC connection request message is sent, and the resource is more accurately and reliably allocated, thereby further avoiding waste of resources for transmitting the RRC connection request message.
图9为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例九的流程图，如图9所示，在图6所示实施例的基础上，在步骤602之后，还可以包括如下步骤：FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a ninth embodiment of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 9, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, after step 602, the following steps may be further included:
步骤901、eNB向UE发送上行反馈资源配置信息，上行反馈资源配置信息所指示的上行反馈资源包括SR资源，或者根据UE对应的PO确定的上行子帧。Step 901: The eNB sends the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the UE, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes an SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the UE.
步骤902、eNB接收UE利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息，获取反馈信息用于指示UE成功获取了第二指示信息。Step 902: The eNB receives the acquiring feedback information that is sent by the UE by using the uplink feedback resource, and the acquiring the feedback information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information.
本实施例中，当UE确定自身为被寻呼对象或有业务时，需要进行数据传输的恢复处理，以进行后续上行数据发送、下行数据接收等数据传输处理。In this embodiment, when the UE determines that it is a paged object or has a service, it needs to perform data transmission recovery processing to perform subsequent data transmission processing such as uplink data transmission and downlink data reception.
数据传输恢复，可以通过RRC连接建立、RRC连接重建立、RRC连 接恢复等过程实现，在通过这些过程实现数据传输恢复的过程中，需要向eNB发送RRC连接请求消息，相应的，该RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。Data transmission recovery, can be established through RRC connection, RRC connection re-establishment, RRC connection In the process of performing recovery and the like, the RRC connection request message needs to be sent to the eNB, and the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message or an RRC connection establishment request message, or The RRC connection re-establishment request message.
发送RRC连接请求消息需要使用相应的资源，因此，eNB需要为UE分配该资源，用于UE进行RRC连接请求消息的发送。The RRC connection request message needs to use the corresponding resource. Therefore, the eNB needs to allocate the resource to the UE for the UE to perform the RRC connection request message transmission.
为了避免eNB资源分配的浪费，本实施例中提供了如下的反馈机制：In order to avoid waste of eNB resource allocation, the following feedback mechanism is provided in this embodiment:
具体的，当UE通过自身的标识信息解码PDCCH获取到指示UE为被寻呼对象或有业务的第二指示信息后，UE利用预先获得的上行反馈资源，向eNB发送获取反馈信息，该获取反馈信息用于指示UE成功获取了第二指示信息。当UE接收到该反馈信息后，为UE分配资源，向UE发送资源配置信息，以使UE根据资源配置信息向eNB发送RRC连接请求消息。Specifically, after the UE obtains the second indication information indicating that the UE is the paged object or has the service, the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB by using the uplink feedback resource obtained in advance, and the acquisition feedback is obtained. The information is used to indicate that the UE successfully obtains the second indication information. After receiving the feedback information, the UE allocates resources to the UE, and sends resource configuration information to the UE, so that the UE sends an RRC connection request message to the eNB according to the resource configuration information.
其中，所述上行反馈资源包括SR资源，或者eNB根据UE对应的PO确定的上行子帧。The uplink feedback resource includes an SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the eNB according to the PO corresponding to the UE.
比如，eNB在UE对应的某个PO之后的第x个上行子帧上配置一个资源。该资源可以传递个物理层信号，类似现在ACK/NACK反馈，也可以反馈一个高层消息，指示成功接收到第二指示信息与否。For example, the eNB configures a resource on the xth uplink subframe after a certain PO corresponding to the UE. The resource may transmit a physical layer signal, similar to the current ACK/NACK feedback, or may feed back a high-level message indicating whether the second indication information is successfully received or not.
步骤903、eNB向UE发送资源配置信息，资源配置信息包括根据UE对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源。Step 903: The eNB sends resource configuration information to the UE, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the UE and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
步骤904、eNB接收UE根据CB-PUSCH资源发送的RRC连接请求消息。Step 904: The eNB receives an RRC connection request message that is sent by the UE according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
本实施例中，可选的，eNB向UE分配的请求资源即用于发送RRC连接请求消息的资源，可以包括eNB根据UE对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源。从而，UE使用该CB-PUSCH资源，通过竞争的方式发送RRC连接请求消息。In this embodiment, optionally, the request resource allocated by the eNB to the UE, that is, the resource for sending the RRC connection request message, may include, by the eNB, determining, according to the PO corresponding to the UE, the next one or more POs adjacent to the PO. CB-PUSCH resources. Therefore, the UE transmits the RRC connection request message in a contention manner using the CB-PUSCH resource.
本实施例中，RRC连接请求消息是基于CB-PUSCH方式的：定义CB-PUSCH的资源配置和发送用于指示UE是否为被寻呼对象或是否有业务的第二指示信息的发送资源，比如寻呼时刻PO之间的关系。In this embodiment, the RRC connection request message is based on the CB-PUSCH mode: a resource configuration for defining a CB-PUSCH and a transmission resource for transmitting a second indication information indicating whether the UE is a paged object or whether there is a service, such as The relationship between paging moments PO.
比如在连续的两次PO之间，eNB定义X个可用的CB-PUSCH资源， 以使得eNB再次发送第二指示信息之前，可以保证UE进行最大X次的RRC连接请求消息的竞争发送。For example, between two consecutive POs, the eNB defines X available CB-PUSCH resources. Before the eNB sends the second indication information again, the UE may be guaranteed to perform the contention transmission of the maximum X times RRC connection request message.
上述反馈机制尤其适用于eNB有下行数据需要发送的情形。针对UE有上行数据需要发送的情形，UE可以在有上行数据需要发送时，主动向eNB请求分配资源，以用于发送RRC连接请求消息。The above feedback mechanism is especially applicable to the case where the eNB has downlink data to be transmitted. In the case that the UE has uplink data to be sent, the UE may actively request allocation of resources to the eNB for transmitting the RRC connection request message when there is uplink data to be sent.
具体来说，针对上行的情况，可以包括如下的分配处理过程：Specifically, for the uplink case, the following allocation process may be included:
eNB接收UE通过SR资源发送的资源请求，其中，SR资源中包括成功获取第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息；The eNB receives the resource request sent by the UE through the SR resource, where the SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted;
eNB向UE发送资源配置信息；The eNB sends resource configuration information to the UE;
eNB接收UE根据资源配置信息发送的RRC连接请求消息。The eNB receives an RRC connection request message that is sent by the UE according to the resource configuration information.
与通过SR资源向eNB反馈获取指示信息不同，此时为UE配置周期性的SR资源，该SR资源是用于向eNB请求资源的，其中包括的获取反馈信息、有上行数据需传输的指示信息，可以理解为是告知eNB请求资源的原因。The method is configured to send the indication information to the eNB by using the SR resource. In this case, the UE is configured with a periodic SR resource, where the SR resource is used to request resources from the eNB, and the received feedback information and the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted. It can be understood as the reason for informing the eNB to request a resource.
本实施例中，UE在通过解码PDCCH获取指示信息，根据第二指示信息确定自己为被寻呼对象或有业务时，向eNB发送获取反馈信息，以告知eNB其已经成功获取第二指示信息，从而使得eNB为UE分配发送RRC连接请求消息所使用的资源，以恢复数据传输更加具有针对性，避免导致分配的资源的浪费。In this embodiment, when the UE obtains the indication information by decoding the PDCCH, and determines that the user is the paged object or has the service according to the second indication information, the UE sends the acquisition feedback information to the eNB to inform the eNB that the second indication information has been successfully obtained. Therefore, the eNB allocates the resources used by the eNB to send the RRC connection request message, so as to restore the data transmission more targeted, and avoid waste of the allocated resources.
图10为本发明实施例提供的数据传输处理方法实施例十的交互图，如图10所示，可以包括如下步骤：FIG. 10 is an interaction diagram of Embodiment 10 of a data transmission processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 10, the method may include the following steps:
步骤1001、UE与eNB进行数据传输。Step 1001: The UE performs data transmission with the eNB.
步骤1002、在一定时间后，UE确定当前没有继续需要传输的数据。Step 1002: After a certain time, the UE determines that data that does not need to be transmitted is currently not continued.
步骤1003、UE向eNB发送上下文信息保存请求。Step 1003: The UE sends a context information save request to the eNB.
或者也可以称为RRC挂起请求，以请求进行UE的上下文信息的保存。Alternatively, it may also be referred to as an RRC suspend request to request to save the context information of the UE.
上述步1002和1003为可选步骤，因此图中用虚线标示。The above steps 1002 and 1003 are optional steps and are therefore indicated by dashed lines in the figure.
步骤1004、eNB确定进行UE的上下文信息的保存，并保存UE的上下文信息。 Step 1004: The eNB determines to save the context information of the UE, and saves the context information of the UE.
或者等价地称之为RRC连接的挂起。具体地，eNB可以是在收到UE发送的上下文信息保存请求时，确定可以进行UE的上下文信息的保存。或者，eNB也可以是根据与UE之间进行数据传输的情况，确定UE已经在一定时间内没有传输数据时，自主确定可以进行UE的上下文信息的保存(或者等价地称之为RRC连接的挂起)。Or equivalently referred to as the hang of the RRC connection. Specifically, the eNB may determine that the context information of the UE may be saved when receiving the context information saving request sent by the UE. Alternatively, the eNB may also determine, according to the case of performing data transmission with the UE, that the UE has not transmitted data within a certain period of time, and autonomously determines that the context information of the UE may be saved (or equivalently referred to as an RRC connection). Hang up).
步骤1005、eNB向MME发送UE的上下文信息保存指示消息。Step 1005: The eNB sends a context information saving indication message of the UE to the MME.
或者称为上下文信息保存请求消息，或者称为RRC连接挂起请求消息，或者称为RRC连接挂起指示消息，以通知MME该UE将处于上下文信息保存状态或者称为RRC连接挂起状态。Or referred to as a context information save request message, or an RRC Connection Suspend Request message, or an RRC Connection Suspend Indication message, to inform the MME that the UE will be in a context information save state or an RRC connection suspend state.
步骤1006、MME向SGW发送UE承载挂起指示消息。Step 1006: The MME sends a UE bearer suspension indication message to the SGW.
该指示消息用于指示SGW所述UE的承载将处于挂起状态，或者暂停传输数据的状态。The indication message is used to indicate that the bearer of the UE of the SGW is to be in a suspended state or to suspend the state of transmitting data.
MME收到eNB发送的UE上下文信息保存指示消息后，确定UE将处于上下文信息保存状态或者RRC连接挂起状态。然后向SGW发送指示消息，以指示SGW所述UE的承载将处于挂起状态，或者暂停传输数据的状态。After receiving the UE context information saving indication message sent by the eNB, the MME determines that the UE is in the context information saving state or the RRC connection suspension state. Then, an indication message is sent to the SGW to indicate that the bearer of the UE of the SGW is to be in a suspended state, or to suspend the state of transmitting data.
步骤1007、S-GW向MME发送承载挂起确认消息。Step 1007: The S-GW sends a bearer suspension confirmation message to the MME.
步骤1008、MME向eNB发送连接挂起确认消息。Step 1008: The MME sends a connection suspension confirmation message to the eNB.
步骤1009、eNB向UE发送上下文信息保存指示消息。Step 1009: The eNB sends a context information saving indication message to the UE.
或者等价地称之为RRC连接挂起指示消息，RRC连接释放指示消息，该上下文信息保存指示消息中携带上下文信息保存指示信息即第一指示信息，以命令UE保存UE的上下文信息。Or the RRC connection suspension indication message, the RRC connection release indication message, which carries the context information storage indication information, that is, the first indication information, to command the UE to save the context information of the UE.
步骤1010、UE保存上下文信息。Step 1010: The UE saves context information.
上下文信息中包括UE的标识信息。The context information includes identification information of the UE.
步骤1011、UE根据UE的标识信息解码PDCCH，在获取第二指示信息后，确定UE为被寻呼对象或有业务。Step 1011: The UE decodes the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the UE, and after obtaining the second indication information, determines that the UE is a paged object or has a service.
步骤1012、UE与eNB交互，以接入网络。Step 1012: The UE interacts with the eNB to access the network.
步骤1013、UE发送上行数据和/或接收下行数据。Step 1013: The UE sends uplink data and/or receives downlink data.
图11为本发明实施例提供的用户设备实施例一的结构示意图，如图11 所示，该用户设备包括：接收模块11、保存模块12、获取模块13、确定模块14。FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 11 The user equipment includes: a receiving module 11, a saving module 12, an obtaining module 13, and a determining module 14.
接收模块11，用于接收基站发送的第一指示信息。The receiving module 11 is configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station.
保存模块12，用于根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息。The saving module 12 is configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment.
获取模块13，用于根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息。The obtaining module 13 is configured to decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquire second indication information.
确定模块14，用于在所述获取模块获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The determining module 14 is configured to determine, when the acquiring module acquires the second indication information, that the user equipment is a paged object or has a service of the user equipment.
可选的，所述用户设备还包括：发送模块15。Optionally, the user equipment further includes: a sending module 15.
发送模块15，用于在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，向所述基站发送上下文信息保存请求。The sending module 15 is configured to send a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
相应的，所述第一指示信息是所述基站根据所述上下文信息保存请求发送的。Correspondingly, the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information saving request.
可选的，所述接收模块11还用于：接收所述基站发送的获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式。Optionally, the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive the obtaining mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquiring mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquiring manner of the second indication information.
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
可选的，所述获取模块13包括：第一获取子模块131，或者第二获取子模块132，或者第三获取子模块133和第四获取子模块134。Optionally, the obtaining module 13 includes: a first obtaining submodule 131, or a second obtaining submodule 132, or a third obtaining submodule 133 and a fourth obtaining submodule 134.
第一获取子模块131，用于若根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息。 The first obtaining sub-module 131 is configured to correctly decode the downlink control information DCI in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station. The format determines that the second indication information is obtained.
第二获取子模块132，用于根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息。a second obtaining sub-module 132, configured to decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station, and obtain the PDCCH The second indication information included in the DCI format.
第三获取子模块133，用于根据P-RNTI检测PDCCH以获取到所述第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息；The third obtaining sub-module 133 is configured to detect the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of the paging message.
第四获取子模块134，用于根据所述调度信息从PDSCH上接收到所述用户设备对应的寻呼消息。The fourth obtaining sub-module 134 is configured to receive, according to the scheduling information, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH.
所述确定模块14，还用于根据所述寻呼消息确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务。The determining module 14 is further configured to determine, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
具体的，所述获取模块13具体用于：Specifically, the obtaining module 13 is specifically configured to:
搜索公共搜索空间CSS或者用户设备特定的搜索空间USS，采用所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH的DCI格式，获取所述第二指示信息。Searching for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, using the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquiring the second indication information.
可选的，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。Optionally, the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
上述图11所示实施例中各种可选的用户设备可以用于执行图1所示实施例中的技术方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，在此不再赘述。The various optional user equipments in the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 11 may be used to implement the technical solution in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1. The implementation principle and the technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图12为本发明实施例提供的用户设备实施例二的结构示意图，如图12所示，在图11所示实施例的基础上，所述保存模块12还用于：FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 12, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, the saving module 12 is further configured to:
根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。And storing, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security key includes an encryption and/or integrity protection key .
所述确定模块14还用于：确定需要恢复的无线承载。The determining module 14 is further configured to: determine a radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
所述用户设备还包括：处理模块21。The user equipment further includes: a processing module 21.
处理模块21，用于使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。The processing module 21 is configured to perform data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
可选的，所述处理模块21用于：Optionally, the processing module 21 is configured to:
在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密。 When it is determined that there is uplink data to be transmitted, the security key and the packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered are used to generate an encryption key stream, and the uplink data is encrypted using the encryption key stream.
所述发送模块15还用于，将加密后的所述上行数据发送给所述基站。The sending module 15 is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
可选的，所述发送模块15还用于：在确定有上行数据需要发送时，根据所述基站预先分配的基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。Optionally, the sending module 15 is further configured to: when determining that the uplink data needs to be sent, send the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource that is pre-allocated by the base station.
可选的，所述处理模块21还用于：Optionally, the processing module 21 is further configured to:
在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。When it is determined that there is downlink data to be received, the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
可选的，所述接收模块11还用于：接收所述基站发送的需要恢复的无线承载标识。Optionally, the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive, by the base station, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered.
相应的，所述确定模块14还用于：根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。Correspondingly, the determining module 14 is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
可选的，所述获取模块13还用于：Optionally, the obtaining module 13 is further configured to:
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息；Decoding a PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment;
或者，or,
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息。The PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
可选的，所述接收模块11还用于：Optionally, the receiving module 11 is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数；Receiving downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the base station, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 ;
根据所述下行数据接收时机配置信息，接收所述下行数据。Receiving the downlink data according to the downlink data reception timing configuration information.
可选的，所述发送模块15还用于：Optionally, the sending module 15 is further configured to:
利用获得的上行反馈资源，向所述基站发送获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。And obtaining, by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, the acquiring feedback information, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully acquires the second indication information.
其中，所述上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者所述基站根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。The uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the base station according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
可选的，所述发送模块15还用于：向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息， 所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。Optionally, the sending module 15 is further configured to: send an RRC connection request message to the base station, where The RRC Connection Request message includes an RRC Connection Recovery Request message, or an RRC Connection Setup Request message, or an RRC Connection Re-establishment Request message.
可选的，所述接收模块11还用于：接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源。Optionally, the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station, where the resource configuration information includes a next one or more POs that are adjacent to the PO according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment. Determined CB-PUSCH resources.
所述发送模块15还用于：根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送所述RRC连接请求。The sending module 15 is further configured to: send the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
可选的，所述发送模块15还用于：通过SR资源向所述基站发送资源请求。Optionally, the sending module 15 is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource.
所述接收模块11还用于：接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息。The receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station.
所述发送模块15还用于：根据所述资源配置信息向所述基站发送所述RRC连接请求消息。The sending module 15 is further configured to: send the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information.
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本实施例提供的用户设备，用于执行图2至图5所示实施例中用户设备的技术方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，不再赘述。The user equipment provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the user equipment in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 5, and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图13为本发明实施例提供的用户设备实施例三的结构示意图，如图13所示，所述用户设备包括：接收器31、处理器32和发送器33。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 13, the user equipment includes: a receiver 31, a processor 32, and a transmitter 33.
接收器31，用于接收基站发送的第一指示信息。The receiver 31 is configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station.
处理器32，用于根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息。The processor 32 is configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment.
所述处理器32还用于根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The processor 32 is further configured to: decode the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, acquire the second indication information, and determine that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于若根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to correctly decode the downlink in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station. Controlling the information DCI format, determining to obtain the second indication information.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获 取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to: decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station, and obtain the PDCCH. And the second indication information included in the DCI format in the PDCCH is taken.
可选的，所述接收器31还用于：接收所述基站发送的获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式。Optionally, the receiver 31 is further configured to: receive the obtaining mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquiring mode indication information is used to instruct the user equipment to acquire the acquiring manner of the second indication information.
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH以获取到所述第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息；根据所述调度信息从PDSCH上接收到所述用户设备对应的寻呼消息；根据所述寻呼消息确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务。Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to detect the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of a paging message, and according to the scheduling information, Receiving, by the paging message, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment, and determining, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于搜索公共搜索空间CSS或者用户设备特定的搜索空间USS，采用所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH的DCI格式，获取所述第二指示信息。Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to search a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, and use the identifier information of the user equipment to decode a DCI format of the PDCCH, and obtain the second indication information.
其中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。The DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
发送器33，用于在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，向所述基站发送上下文信息保存请求。The transmitter 33 is configured to send a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
其中，所述第一指示信息是所述基站根据所述上下文信息保存请求发送的。The first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information save request.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to save, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security is performed. The key contains an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
所述处理器32还用于确定需要恢复的无线承载；The processor 32 is further configured to determine a radio bearer that needs to be restored;
所述处理器32还用于使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载 的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。The processor 32 is further configured to use the security key and the radio bearer that needs to be restored The data packet counter performs data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于：Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to:
在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密。When it is determined that there is uplink data to be transmitted, the security key and the packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered are used to generate an encryption key stream, and the uplink data is encrypted using the encryption key stream.
所述发送器33还用于，将加密后的所述上行数据发送给所述基站。The transmitter 33 is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
可选的，所述发送器33还用于：在确定有上行数据需要发送时，根据所述基站预先分配的基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。Optionally, the transmitter 33 is further configured to: when determining that the uplink data needs to be sent, send the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource that is pre-allocated by the base station.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于：Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to:
在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。When it is determined that there is downlink data to be received, the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
可选的，所述接收器31还用于：接收所述基站发送的需要恢复的无线承载标识。Optionally, the receiver 31 is further configured to: receive, by the base station, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered.
所述处理器32还用于：根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。The processor 32 is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be restored.
可选的，所述处理器32还用于：Optionally, the processor 32 is further configured to:
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息；Decoding a PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment;
或者，or,
根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息。The PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
可选的，所述接收器31还用于：Optionally, the receiver 31 is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数；Receiving downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the base station, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 ;
根据所述下行数据接收时机配置信息，接收所述下行数据。Receiving the downlink data according to the downlink data reception timing configuration information.
可选的，所述发送器33还用于： Optionally, the transmitter 33 is further configured to:
利用获得的上行反馈资源，向所述基站发送获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。And obtaining, by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, the acquiring feedback information, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully acquires the second indication information.
其中，所述上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者所述基站根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。The uplink feedback resource includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the base station according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
可选的，所述发送器33还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 33 is further configured to:
向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。And transmitting, by the base station, an RRC connection request message, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
可选的，所述接收器31还用于：Optionally, the receiver 31 is further configured to:
接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源。And receiving, by the base station, resource configuration information, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
所述发送器33还用于：The transmitter 33 is also used to:
根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送所述RRC连接请求。And transmitting the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
可选的，所述发送器33还用于：通过SR资源向所述基站发送资源请求。Optionally, the sender 33 is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource.
所述接收器31还用于：接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息。The receiver 31 is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station.
所述发送器33还用于：根据所述资源配置信息向所述基站发送所述RRC连接请求消息。The transmitter 33 is further configured to: send the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information.
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本实施例提供的用户设备，用于执行图1至图5所示实施例中用户设备的技术方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，不再赘述。The user equipment provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the user equipment in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 5 , and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图14为本发明实施例提供的基站实施例一的结构示意图，如图14所示，所述基站包括：确定模块41、发送模块42。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 14, the base station includes: a determining module 41 and a sending module 42.
确定模块41，用于确定用户设备在预设时间内是否有进行数据传输。The determining module 41 is configured to determine whether the user equipment performs data transmission within a preset time.
发送模块42，用于用户设备在预设时间内没有进行数据传输时，向用户设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括的所述用 户设备的标识信息。The sending module 42 is configured to: when the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time, send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to instruct the user equipment to save the user according to the first indication information. Context information of the device, the use included in the context information Identification information of the household device.
所述发送模块42，还用于通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户设备在根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The sending module 42 is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment, when decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, acquires the second indication information, Determining that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
可选的，所述指示信息包括：所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，或者，所述第二指示信息携带于DCI格式中；Optionally, the indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
所述用户设备的标识信息，用于在覆盖所述用户设备的基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备。The identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Sending the acquisition mode indication information to the user equipment, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
其中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。The DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
进一步可选地，该基站还包括：接收模块43、保存模块44。Further optionally, the base station further includes: a receiving module 43 and a saving module 44.
接收模块43，用于接收所述用户设备发送的上下文信息保存请求，所述上下文信息保存请求是所述用户设备在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时发送的。The receiving module 43 is configured to receive a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the context information saving request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time.
所述确定模块41，具体用于根据所述上下文信息保存请求确定所述用户设备在预设时间内没有进行数据传输。The determining module 41 is specifically configured to determine, according to the context information saving request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time.
保存模块44，用于保存所述上下文信息。The saving module 44 is configured to save the context information.
或者，确定模块41在确定用户设备在预设时间内没有需要进行传输 的数据时，触发保存模块44保存所述上下文信息，并触发发送模块11向所述用户设备发送所述第一指示信息。Alternatively, the determining module 41 determines that the user equipment does not need to transmit within a preset time. The triggering save module 44 saves the context information, and triggers the sending module 11 to send the first indication information to the user equipment.
可选的，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，并在确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务之后，确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。Optionally, the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determining the After the user equipment is the paged object or the service of the user equipment, determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and perform the recovery for the need by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored. Radio bearer data transmission, the security key containing an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
可选的，所述接收模块43还用于：Optionally, the receiving module 43 is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的上行数据，所述上行数据是所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密后发送的。Receiving uplink data sent by the user equipment, where the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源，所述CB-PUSCH资源用于指示所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。Sending, by the user equipment, a contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to indicate that the user equipment sends the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据，以使所述用户设备在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的所述下行数据。Sending downlink data to the user equipment, so that when determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received downlink data. .
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，所述需要恢复的无线承载标识用于指示所述用户设备根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。Sending, to the user equipment, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送所述第二指示信息；Transmitting, by the PDCCH, the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment, respectively;
或者，or,
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后 的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息。Passing the PDCCH, after a PO corresponding to the user equipment and the PO N pieces of second indication information are continuously transmitted on consecutive N-1 subframes.
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数。Sending downlink data reception timing configuration information to the user equipment, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 .
可选的，所述接收模块43还用于：Optionally, the receiving module 43 is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。Receiving the acquisition feedback information sent by the user equipment by using the uplink feedback resource, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully obtains the second indication information.
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送上行反馈资源配置信息，所述上行反馈资源配置信息所指示的上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。Sending the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
可选的，所述接收模块43还用于：Optionally, the receiving module 43 is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
可选的，所述发送模块42还用于：Optionally, the sending module 42 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；Transmitting the resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
所述接收模块43还用于：The receiving module 43 is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送的RRC连接请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
可选的，所述接收模块43还用于：接收所述用户设备通过SR资源发送的资源请求；Optionally, the receiving module 43 is further configured to: receive a resource request sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
所述发送模块42还用于：向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息；The sending module 42 is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment;
所述接收模块43还用于：接收所述用户设备根据所述资源配置信息发送的所述RRC连接请求消息；The receiving module 43 is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。 The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本实施例提供的基站，用于执行图6至图10所示实施例中基站的技术方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，不再赘述。The base station provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 10, and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图15为本发明实施例提供的基站实施例二的结构示意图，如图15所示，该基站包括：发送器51、处理器52、接收器53。FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 15, the base station includes: a transmitter 51, a processor 52, and a receiver 53.
发送器51，用于向用户设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括的所述用户设备的标识信息。The sender 51 is configured to send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes The identification information of the user equipment.
所述发送器51，还用于通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户设备在根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The transmitter 51 is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment, when decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, acquires the second indication information, Determining that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
可选的，所述指示信息包括：所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，或者，所述第二指示信息携带于DCI格式中；Optionally, the indication information includes: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
所述用户设备的标识信息，用于在覆盖所述用户设备的基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备。The identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
可选的，所述发送器51还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Sending the acquisition mode indication information to the user equipment, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
其中，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。The DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
接收器53，用于接收所述用户设备发送的上下文信息保存请求，所述上 下文信息保存请求是所述用户设备在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时发送的。The receiver 53 is configured to receive a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the The information save request is sent when the user equipment does not need to transmit data within a preset time.
所述处理器52还用于：根据所述上下文信息保存请求确定所述用户设备在预设时间内没有进行数据传输；保存所述上下文信息。The processor 52 is further configured to: determine, according to the context information save request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time; and save the context information.
或者，所述处理器52还用于：在确定用户设备在预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，保存所述上下文信息。Alternatively, the processor 52 is further configured to: save the context information when determining that the user equipment does not need to transmit data within a preset time.
可选的，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，并在确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务之后，确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。Optionally, the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, and determining the After the user equipment is the paged object or the service of the user equipment, determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and perform the recovery for the need by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be restored. Radio bearer data transmission, the security key containing an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
可选的，所述接收器53还用于：Optionally, the receiver 53 is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的上行数据，所述上行数据是所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密后发送的。Receiving uplink data sent by the user equipment, where the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
可选的，所述发送器51还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源，所述CB-PUSCH资源用于指示所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。Sending, by the user equipment, a contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to indicate that the user equipment sends the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
可选的，所述发送器51还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据，以使所述用户设备在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的所述下行数据。Sending downlink data to the user equipment, so that when determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received downlink data. .
可选的，所述发送器51还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，所述需要恢复的无线承载标识用于指示所述用户设备根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。Sending, to the user equipment, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
可选的，所述发送器51还用于： Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送所述第二指示信息；Transmitting, by the PDCCH, the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment, respectively;
或者，or,
通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息。And transmitting, by the PDCCH, N pieces of second indication information continuously on one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO.
可选的，所述发送器51还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数。Sending downlink data reception timing configuration information to the user equipment, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 .
可选的，所述接收器53还用于：Optionally, the receiver 53 is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。Receiving the acquisition feedback information sent by the user equipment by using the uplink feedback resource, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully obtains the second indication information.
可选的，所述发送器51还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送上行反馈资源配置信息，所述上行反馈资源配置信息所指示的上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。Sending the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
可选的，所述接收器53还用于：Optionally, the receiver 53 is further configured to:
接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
可选的，所述发送器51还用于：Optionally, the transmitter 51 is further configured to:
向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源。Transmitting resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO.
所述接收器53还用于：The receiver 53 is also used to:
接收所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送的RRC连接请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
可选的，所述接收器53还用于：接收所述用户设备通过SR资源发送的资源请求。Optionally, the receiver 53 is further configured to: receive a resource request sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource.
所述发送器51还用于：向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息。 The transmitter 51 is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment.
所述接收器53还用于：接收所述用户设备根据所述资源配置信息发送的所述RRC连接请求消息。The receiver 53 is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information.
其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
本实施例提供的基站，用于执行图6至图10所示实施例中基站的技术方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，不再赘述The base station provided in this embodiment is used to implement the technical solution of the base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 10, and the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
在上述用户设备和基站的实施例中，应理解，该处理器可以是中央处理单元(英文：Central Processing Unit，简称：CPU)，还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(英文：Digital Signal Processor，简称：DSP)、专用集成电路(英文：Application Specific Integrated Circuit，简称：ASIC)等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the foregoing embodiments of the user equipment and the base station, it should be understood that the processor may be a central processing unit (English: Central Processing Unit, CPU for short), or may be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (English: Digital) Signal Processor (DSP), Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), etc. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解：实现上述各方法实施例的全部或部分步骤可以通过程序指令相关的硬件来完成。前述的程序可以存储于一计算机可读取存储介质中。该程序在执行时，执行包括上述各方法实施例的步骤；而前述的存储介质包括：只读存储器(英文：read-only memory，缩写：ROM)、RAM、快闪存储器、硬盘、固态硬盘、磁带(英文：magnetic tape)、软盘(英文：floppy disk)、光盘(英文：optical disc)及其任意组合。One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that all or part of the steps to implement the various method embodiments described above may be accomplished by hardware associated with the program instructions. The aforementioned program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. When the program is executed, the steps including the foregoing method embodiments are performed; and the foregoing storage medium includes: read-only memory (English: read-only memory, abbreviation: ROM), RAM, flash memory, hard disk, solid state hard disk, Magnetic tape (English: magnetic tape), floppy disk (English: floppy disk), optical disc (English: optical disc) and any combination thereof.
最后应说明的是：以上各实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案，而非对其限制；尽管参照前述各实施例对本发明进行了详细的说明，本领域的普通技术人员应当理解：其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改，或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换；而这些修改或者替换，并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本发明各实施例技术方案的范围。 Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are merely illustrative of the technical solutions of the present invention, and are not intended to be limiting; although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art will understand that The technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments may be modified, or some or all of the technical features may be equivalently replaced; and the modifications or substitutions do not deviate from the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention. range.

Claims (40)

  1. 一种用户设备，其特征在于，包括：A user equipment, comprising:
    接收模块，用于接收基站发送的第一指示信息；a receiving module, configured to receive first indication information sent by the base station;
    保存模块，用于根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息；a saving module, configured to save context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes identifier information of the user equipment;
    获取模块，用于根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息；An acquiring module, configured to decode a physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, to obtain second indication information;
    确定模块，用于在所述获取模块获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。And a determining module, configured to determine, when the acquiring module acquires the second indication information, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述获取模块包括：The user equipment according to claim 1, wherein the obtaining module comprises:
    第一获取子模块，用于若根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息；a first obtaining submodule, configured to correctly decode downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station Determining that the second indication information is obtained;
    或者，所述获取模块包括：Alternatively, the obtaining module includes:
    第二获取子模块，用于根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息。a second acquiring sub-module, configured to decode the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in a range of the base station or one or more cells of the base station, and acquire the DCI in the PDCCH The second indication information included in the format.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：The user equipment according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the receiving module is further configured to:
    接收所述基站发送的获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Receiving the acquisition mode indication information sent by the base station, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
    所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
    第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
    第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
    第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述获取模块包括： The user equipment according to claim 1, wherein the obtaining module comprises:
    第三获取子模块，用于根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH以获取到所述第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息为寻呼消息的调度信息；a third acquiring submodule, configured to detect the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI to obtain the second indication information, where the second indication information is scheduling information of a paging message;
    第四获取子模块，用于根据所述调度信息从PDSCH上接收到所述用户设备对应的寻呼消息；a fourth obtaining submodule, configured to receive, according to the scheduling information, a paging message corresponding to the user equipment from the PDSCH;
    所述确定模块，还用于根据所述寻呼消息确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务。The determining module is further configured to determine, according to the paging message, that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述获取模块具体用于：The user equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the obtaining module is specifically configured to:
    搜索公共搜索空间CSS或者用户设备特定的搜索空间USS，采用所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH的DCI格式，获取所述第二指示信息。Searching for a common search space CSS or a user equipment-specific search space USS, using the identification information of the user equipment to decode the DCI format of the PDCCH, and acquiring the second indication information.
  6. 根据权利要求2至5中任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。The user equipment according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述用户设备还包括：The user equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the user equipment further comprises:
    发送模块，用于在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时，向所述基站发送上下文信息保存请求。And a sending module, configured to send a context information saving request to the base station when determining that there is no data to be transmitted within a preset time.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息是所述基站根据所述上下文信息保存请求发送的。The user equipment according to claim 7, wherein the first indication information is sent by the base station according to the context information saving request.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述保存模块还用于：The user equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the saving module is further configured to:
    根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥；And storing, according to the first indication information, a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station, and a data packet counter of at least one radio bearer, where the security key includes an encryption and/or integrity protection key ;
    所述确定模块还用于：确定需要恢复的无线承载；The determining module is further configured to: determine a radio bearer that needs to be restored;
    所述用户设备还包括：The user equipment further includes:
    处理模块，用于使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输。And a processing module, configured to perform, by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块用于：The user equipment according to claim 9, wherein the processing module is configured to:
    在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的 无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密；Using the security key and the need to recover when it is determined that there is uplink data to be sent The radio bearer packet counter generates an encrypted key stream, and the encrypted data stream is used to encrypt the uplink data;
    所述发送模块还用于，将加密后的所述上行数据发送给所述基站。The sending module is further configured to send the encrypted uplink data to the base station.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发送模块，还用于：在确定有上行数据需要发送时，根据所述基站预先分配的基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。The user equipment according to claim 10, wherein the sending module is further configured to: when the uplink data needs to be sent, the contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource pre-allocated according to the base station The uplink data is sent in a competitive manner.
  12. 根据权利要求9所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块还用于：The user equipment according to claim 9, wherein the processing module is further configured to:
    在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的下行数据。When it is determined that there is downlink data to be received, the received downlink data is decrypted using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be recovered.
  13. 根据权利要求9至12中任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：接收所述基站发送的需要恢复的无线承载标识；The user equipment according to any one of claims 9 to 12, wherein the receiving module is further configured to: receive a radio bearer identifier that is sent by the base station and needs to be restored;
    所述确定模块还用于：根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。The determining module is further configured to: determine, according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be recovered, the radio bearer that needs to be restored.
  14. 根据权利要求1至13中任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述获取模块还用于：The user equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the obtaining module is further configured to:
    根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送的第二指示信息中的任一个第二指示信息；Decoding a PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring any one of the second indication information that is sent by the base station to the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment;
    或者，or,
    根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH，获取所述基站在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送的N个第二指示信息。The PDCCH is decoded according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and the N pieces of second indication information continuously sent by the base station to one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO are obtained.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：The user equipment according to claim 14, wherein the receiving module is further configured to:
    接收所述基站发送的下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数；Receiving downlink data reception timing configuration information sent by the base station, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 ;
    根据所述下行数据接收时机配置信息，接收所述下行数据。 Receiving the downlink data according to the downlink data reception timing configuration information.
  16. 根据权利要求1至15中任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The user equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    利用获得的上行反馈资源，向所述基站发送获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。And obtaining, by using the obtained uplink feedback resource, the acquiring feedback information, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully acquires the second indication information.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者所述基站根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。The user equipment according to claim 16, wherein the uplink feedback resource comprises a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined by the base station according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发送模块，还用于：The user equipment according to claim 16, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    向所述基站发送RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。And transmitting, by the base station, an RRC connection request message, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：The user equipment according to claim 18, wherein the receiving module is further configured to:
    接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；Receiving, by the base station, resource configuration information, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
    所述发送模块还用于：The sending module is further configured to:
    根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送所述RRC连接请求。And transmitting the RRC connection request according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  20. 根据权利要求18所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：通过SR资源向所述基站发送资源请求；The user equipment according to claim 18, wherein the sending module is further configured to: send a resource request to the base station by using an SR resource;
    所述接收模块还用于：接收所述基站发送的资源配置信息；The receiving module is further configured to: receive resource configuration information sent by the base station;
    所述发送模块还用于：根据所述资源配置信息向所述基站发送所述RRC连接请求消息；The sending module is further configured to: send the RRC connection request message to the base station according to the resource configuration information;
    其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  21. 一种基站，其特征在于，包括：A base station, comprising:
    发送模块，用于向用户设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备根据所述第一指示信息保存用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括的所述用户设备的标识信息； a sending module, configured to send the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes Identification information of the user equipment;
    所述发送模块，还用于通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户设备在根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。The sending module is further configured to send the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines, when the second indication information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, The user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的基站，其特征在于，所述指示信息包括：所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，或者，所述第二指示信息携带于DCI格式中；The base station according to claim 21, wherein the indication information comprises: a downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH, or the second indication information is carried in a DCI format;
    所述用户设备的标识信息，用于在覆盖所述用户设备的基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备。The identifier information of the user equipment is used to identify the user equipment within a range of a base station that covers the user equipment or one or more cell ranges of the base station.
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The base station according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    向所述用户设备发送获取方式指示信息，所述获取方式指示信息用于指示所述用户设备获取所述第二指示信息的获取方式；Sending the acquisition mode indication information to the user equipment, where the acquisition mode indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment acquires the acquisition manner of the second indication information;
    所述获取方式包括下列方式中的至少两项：The obtaining manner includes at least two of the following ways:
    第一获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式获取所述第二指示信息；The first acquisition mode: correctly decoding the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and obtains the first Two indication information;
    第二获取方式：根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息；a second acquiring manner: decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information;
    第三获取方式：根据P-RNTI检测所述PDCCH，获取所述第二指示信息。The third obtaining mode is: detecting the PDCCH according to the P-RNTI, and acquiring the second indication information.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的基站，其特征在于，所述DCI格式中还包含***信息改变指示信息和/或紧急服务指示信息。The base station according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the DCI format further includes system information change indication information and/or emergency service indication information.
  25. 根据权利要求21至24中任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，还包括：The base station according to any one of claims 21 to 24, further comprising:
    接收模块，用于接收所述用户设备发送的上下文信息保存请求，所述上下文信息保存请求是所述用户设备在确定预设时间内没有需要进行传输的数据时发送的；a receiving module, configured to receive a context information saving request sent by the user equipment, where the context information saving request is sent by the user equipment when determining that data is not required to be transmitted within a preset time period;
    确定模块，具体用于根据所述上下文信息保存请求确定所述用户设备在预设时间内没有进行数据传输；a determining module, configured to determine, according to the context information saving request, that the user equipment does not perform data transmission within a preset time;
    保存模块，用于保存所述上下文信息。 A save module for saving the context information.
  26. 根据权利要求21至25中任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备保存所述用户设备与所述基站之间执行数据传输的安全密钥以及至少一个无线承载的数据包计数器，并在确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或有所述用户设备的业务之后，确定需要恢复的无线承载，并使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器执行针对所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据传输，所述安全密钥包含加密和/或完整性保护密钥。The base station according to any one of claims 21 to 25, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the user equipment to save a security key for performing data transmission between the user equipment and the base station. And at least one radio bearer packet counter, and after determining that the user equipment is a paged object or a service of the user equipment, determining a radio bearer that needs to be recovered, and using the security key and the requirement The data counter of the recovered radio bearer performs a data transmission for the radio bearer that needs to be recovered, the security key containing an encryption and/or integrity protection key.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的基站，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：The base station according to claim 26, wherein the receiving module is further configured to:
    接收所述用户设备发送的上行数据，所述上行数据是所述用户设备在确定有上行数据需要发送时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器生成加密密钥流，使用所述加密密钥流对所述上行数据加密后发送的。Receiving uplink data sent by the user equipment, where the uplink data is used by the user equipment to generate an encryption key by using the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer that needs to be restored when determining that uplink data needs to be sent. And transmitting, using the encrypted key stream, the uplink data is encrypted and sent.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The base station according to claim 27, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    向所述用户设备发送基于竞争的物理上行共享信道CB-PUSCH资源，所述CB-PUSCH资源用于指示所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源通过竞争的方式发送所述上行数据。Sending, by the user equipment, a contention-based physical uplink shared channel CB-PUSCH resource, where the CB-PUSCH resource is used to indicate that the user equipment sends the uplink data in a contentive manner according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  29. 根据权利要求26所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The base station according to claim 26, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    向所述用户设备发送下行数据，以使所述用户设备在确定有下行数据需要接收时，使用所述安全密钥和所述需要恢复的无线承载的数据包计数器解密接收到的所述下行数据。Sending downlink data to the user equipment, so that when determining that downlink data needs to be received, the user equipment uses the security key and the data packet counter of the radio bearer to be recovered to decrypt the received downlink data. .
  30. 根据权利要求26至29中任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The base station according to any one of claims 26 to 29, wherein the transmitting module is further configured to:
    向所述用户设备发送需要恢复的无线承载标识，所述需要恢复的无线承载标识用于指示所述用户设备根据所述需要恢复的无线承载标识，确定所述需要恢复的无线承载。Sending, to the user equipment, a radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored, where the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored is used to instruct the user equipment to determine the radio bearer that needs to be recovered according to the radio bearer identifier that needs to be restored.
  31. 根据权利要求21至30中任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于： The base station according to any one of claims 21 to 30, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的N个不同寻呼时机PO上分别发送所述第二指示信息；Transmitting, by the PDCCH, the second indication information on the N different paging occasions PO corresponding to the user equipment, respectively;
    或者，or,
    通过所述PDCCH，在所述用户设备对应的一个PO以及所述PO之后的连续N-1个子帧上连续发送N个第二指示信息。And transmitting, by the PDCCH, N pieces of second indication information continuously on one PO corresponding to the user equipment and consecutive N-1 subframes after the PO.
  32. 根据权利要求30所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The base station according to claim 30, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    向所述用户设备发送下行数据接收时机配置信息，所述下行数据接收时机配置信息指示了在获取到所述第二指示信息后的m个子帧，接收下行数据，m为大于或等于0的整数。Sending downlink data reception timing configuration information to the user equipment, where the downlink data reception timing configuration information indicates that m subframes after the second indication information is acquired, and receiving downlink data, where m is an integer greater than or equal to 0 .
  33. 根据权利要求21至32中任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：The base station according to any one of claims 21 to 32, wherein the receiving module is further configured to:
    接收所述用户设备利用上行反馈资源发送的获取反馈信息，所述获取反馈信息用于指示所述用户设备成功获取了所述第二指示信息。Receiving the acquisition feedback information sent by the user equipment by using the uplink feedback resource, where the obtaining feedback information is used to indicate that the user equipment successfully obtains the second indication information.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The base station according to claim 33, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    向所述用户设备发送上行反馈资源配置信息，所述上行反馈资源配置信息所指示的上行反馈资源包括调度请求SR资源，或者根据所述用户设备对应的PO确定的上行子帧。Sending the uplink feedback resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the uplink feedback resource indicated by the uplink feedback resource configuration information includes a scheduling request SR resource, or an uplink subframe determined according to the PO corresponding to the user equipment.
  35. 根据权利要求21至34中任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：The base station according to any one of claims 21 to 34, wherein the receiving module is further configured to:
    接收所述用户设备发送的RRC连接请求消息，所述RRC连接请求消息包括RRC连接恢复请求消息，或者RRC连接建立请求消息，或者RRC连接重建立请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment, where the RRC connection request message includes an RRC connection recovery request message, or an RRC connection setup request message, or an RRC connection re-establishment request message.
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：The base station according to claim 35, wherein the sending module is further configured to:
    向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息，所述资源配置信息包括根据所述用户设备对应的PO与所述PO相邻的下一个或多个PO确定的CB-PUSCH资源；Transmitting the resource configuration information to the user equipment, where the resource configuration information includes a CB-PUSCH resource determined according to a PO corresponding to the user equipment and a next one or more POs adjacent to the PO;
    所述接收模块还用于： The receiving module is further configured to:
    接收所述用户设备根据所述CB-PUSCH资源发送的RRC连接请求消息。And receiving an RRC connection request message sent by the user equipment according to the CB-PUSCH resource.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的基站，其特征在于，所述接收模块还用于：接收所述用户设备通过SR资源发送的资源请求；The base station according to claim 36, wherein the receiving module is further configured to: receive a resource request sent by the user equipment by using an SR resource;
    所述发送模块还用于：向所述用户设备发送资源配置信息；The sending module is further configured to: send resource configuration information to the user equipment;
    所述接收模块还用于：接收所述用户设备根据所述资源配置信息发送的所述RRC连接请求消息；The receiving module is further configured to: receive the RRC connection request message that is sent by the user equipment according to the resource configuration information;
    其中，所述SR资源中包括成功获取所述第二指示信息的获取反馈信息和/或有上行数据需要传输的指示信息。The SR resource includes the acquisition feedback information for successfully acquiring the second indication information and/or the indication information that the uplink data needs to be transmitted.
  38. 一种数据传输处理方法，其特征在于，包括：A data transmission processing method, comprising:
    用户设备接收基站发送的第一指示信息，并根据所述第一指示信息保存所述用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括所述用户设备的标识信息；The user equipment receives the first indication information sent by the base station, and saves the context information of the user equipment according to the first indication information, where the context information includes the identifier information of the user equipment;
    所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。Decoding, by the user equipment, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine that the user equipment is a paged object or has the user equipment. business.
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的方法，其特征在于，所述用户设备根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码物理下行控制信道PDCCH，获取第二指示信息，包括：The method according to claim 38, wherein the decoding, by the user equipment, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment, and acquiring the second indication information, includes:
    若所述用户设备根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息正确解码所述PDCCH中的下行控制信息DCI格式，则确定获取到所述第二指示信息；Determining, if the user equipment correctly decodes the downlink control information DCI format in the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, To the second indication information;
    或者，or,
    所述用户设备根据在所述基站范围内或者所述基站的一个或多个小区范围内标识所述用户设备的所述标识信息解码所述PDCCH，获取所述PDCCH中所述DCI格式中包含的所述第二指示信息。Decoding, by the user equipment, the PDCCH according to the identifier information that identifies the user equipment in the range of the base station or the one or more cells of the base station, and acquiring the DCI format included in the PDCCH The second indication information.
  40. 一种数据传输处理方法，其特征在于，包括：A data transmission processing method, comprising:
    基站向用户设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述用户设备保存所述用户设备的上下文信息，所述上下文信息中包括的所述用户设备的标识信息； The base station sends the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment saves the context information of the user equipment, and the identifier information of the user equipment included in the context information;
    所述基站通过PDCCH发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户设备在根据所述用户设备的标识信息解码PDCCH获取所述第二指示信息时，确定所述用户设备为被寻呼对象或者有所述用户设备的业务。 The base station sends the second indication information by using the PDCCH, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the user equipment determines that the user equipment is when the second indicator information is obtained by decoding the PDCCH according to the identifier information of the user equipment. The object being paged or having the service of the user equipment.
PCT/CN2015/100312 2015-12-31 2015-12-31 Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station WO2017113391A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP15912015.3A EP3389329B1 (en) 2015-12-31 2015-12-31 User equipment and base station
PCT/CN2015/100312 WO2017113391A1 (en) 2015-12-31 2015-12-31 Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station
CN201580085281.8A CN108370594B (en) 2015-12-31 2015-12-31 Data transmission processing method, user equipment and base station
US16/023,353 US10412705B2 (en) 2015-12-31 2018-06-29 Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station
US16/535,818 US20190364539A1 (en) 2015-12-31 2019-08-08 Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2015/100312 WO2017113391A1 (en) 2015-12-31 2015-12-31 Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/023,353 Continuation US10412705B2 (en) 2015-12-31 2018-06-29 Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017113391A1 true WO2017113391A1 (en) 2017-07-06

Family

ID=59224417

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2015/100312 WO2017113391A1 (en) 2015-12-31 2015-12-31 Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (2) US10412705B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3389329B1 (en)
CN (1) CN108370594B (en)
WO (1) WO2017113391A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109474998A (en) * 2017-09-08 2019-03-15 华为技术有限公司 Communication means and communication equipment
CN109644408A (en) * 2018-05-08 2019-04-16 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communications method, equipment, chip and system
WO2020199552A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11129228B2 (en) * 2017-02-02 2021-09-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for determining RRC state
CN109152045B (en) * 2017-06-19 2021-08-20 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method, device, user equipment and base station for determining downlink control channel resources
CN110933761B (en) * 2018-09-20 2022-02-15 成都华为技术有限公司 Resource scheduling method and equipment
CN114679770B (en) * 2018-10-31 2024-03-08 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 PDCCH monitoring method and device
CN111132332A (en) * 2018-10-31 2020-05-08 华硕电脑股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for transmitting using preconfigured uplink resources
CN112040479B (en) * 2020-09-25 2023-10-27 郑州轻工业大学 Method and system for transmitting encrypted information in real time for information security
CN112492274B (en) * 2020-11-26 2021-08-17 江南大学 National secret encryption transmission equipment based on common network camera

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101651850A (en) * 2008-08-13 2010-02-17 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for transmitting major notification messages of earthquake and tsunami warning system
CN102655666A (en) * 2011-03-02 2012-09-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Scheduling delay method and system
CN103037470A (en) * 2011-09-29 2013-04-10 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for obtaining access control information
US20140126448A1 (en) * 2011-06-22 2014-05-08 Nec Europe Ltd. Energy awareness in mobile communication user equipment and networks, including optimizations based on state compression
CN104247553A (en) * 2013-03-22 2014-12-24 华为技术有限公司 Method and equipment for establishing connection

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009057941A2 (en) * 2007-10-29 2009-05-07 Lg Electronics Inc. A method for repairing an error depending on a radion bearer type
KR100943078B1 (en) * 2007-12-14 2010-02-18 한국전자통신연구원 A bearer control and management method in the IP-based evolved UMTS Network
US8611895B2 (en) * 2009-10-30 2013-12-17 Apple Inc. Methods for optimizing paging mechanisms using device context information
CA2832067C (en) * 2011-04-01 2019-10-01 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling connectivity to a network
US20130148563A1 (en) * 2011-12-10 2013-06-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Apparatus and methods for management, configuration and control signaling of network coded harq in mobile communication systems
CN103491643B (en) * 2012-06-12 2018-03-27 电信科学技术研究院 The method for building up and equipment of group communication connection
US8811332B2 (en) * 2012-10-31 2014-08-19 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Systems and methods for carrier aggregation
GB2513311B (en) * 2013-04-22 2020-05-27 Sony Corp Communications device and method
CN105101044B (en) * 2014-05-08 2020-03-10 夏普株式会社 Paging message receiving/transmitting method and related device thereof

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101651850A (en) * 2008-08-13 2010-02-17 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for transmitting major notification messages of earthquake and tsunami warning system
CN102655666A (en) * 2011-03-02 2012-09-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Scheduling delay method and system
US20140126448A1 (en) * 2011-06-22 2014-05-08 Nec Europe Ltd. Energy awareness in mobile communication user equipment and networks, including optimizations based on state compression
CN103037470A (en) * 2011-09-29 2013-04-10 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for obtaining access control information
CN104247553A (en) * 2013-03-22 2014-12-24 华为技术有限公司 Method and equipment for establishing connection

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109474998A (en) * 2017-09-08 2019-03-15 华为技术有限公司 Communication means and communication equipment
CN109644408A (en) * 2018-05-08 2019-04-16 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communications method, equipment, chip and system
EP3618519A4 (en) * 2018-05-08 2020-08-12 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Wireless communication method, apparatus, chip, and system
CN109644408B (en) * 2018-05-08 2020-11-17 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communication method, device, chip and system
US11064456B2 (en) 2018-05-08 2021-07-13 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Wireless communication method, device, chip and system
WO2020199552A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20190364539A1 (en) 2019-11-28
US10412705B2 (en) 2019-09-10
EP3389329A1 (en) 2018-10-17
US20180317202A1 (en) 2018-11-01
EP3389329B1 (en) 2020-09-02
CN108370594B (en) 2020-09-25
EP3389329A4 (en) 2019-04-10
CN108370594A (en) 2018-08-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2017113391A1 (en) Data transmission processing method, user equipment, and base station
US11388695B2 (en) Multipurpose downlink control information bit fields
EP3178272B1 (en) Resource allocation and ue behavior for d2d synchronization signal transmission for inter-cell d2d discovery
US10098142B2 (en) Terminal apparatus, base station apparatus, communication system, resource management method, and integrated circuit
EP2952049B1 (en) Paging procedures using an enhanced control channel
EP3522632A1 (en) Terminal device, communication method, and integrated circuit
WO2016183728A1 (en) Terminal, base station and scheduling request transmission method
WO2012149848A1 (en) Method, system and device for data transmission
JPWO2016121666A1 (en) Terminal apparatus, base station apparatus, integrated circuit, and communication method
WO2011097998A1 (en) Method, system and device for scheduling non-competing random access and transmitting preamble.
CN112970301B (en) Acknowledgement for downlink early data transmission in paging messages
JP2020074623A (en) Communication method, user device, and processor
US10070420B2 (en) Mobile communication system and user terminal
JP7400008B2 (en) Wireless terminals and base stations
WO2014000309A1 (en) Downlink control information transmission method, base station and terminal
WO2013097685A1 (en) Method for transmitting subframe information, user equipment and base station
US10375685B2 (en) Secondary timing advance groups with only license assisted access secondary cells
CN111095838A (en) Early data retransmission for message 3
JPWO2016121731A1 (en) Terminal device, integrated circuit, and communication method
US11044768B2 (en) User equipment apparatus and signal reception method
WO2017028511A1 (en) Listening control method, terminal, base station, system, and computer storage medium
WO2017024468A1 (en) Random access method and apparatus
US20200015315A1 (en) Radio terminal, processor, and base station
JP2017017625A (en) User device, wireless communication system, and communication method
WO2018149280A1 (en) Data receiving method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15912015

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2015912015

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2015912015

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20180711